9. 《大念处经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
总说分注释显示巴利原文
Uddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā
373 「为何世尊宣说此经?」此问是在探求不共的起因。至于共通的起因,因其“已明显”而未加理会,故只说“对俱卢国的居民”等。所谓“起因”,即说法之因缘,依共通与不共之别,分为两种;共通又依内在与外在,分为两种。其中,共通的内在起因,即世尊的大悲心。世尊由大悲所策励,为应度者生起说法之心。如经云:“缘于对众生之悲悯,以佛眼观察世间”(《长部》2.69;《中部》1.283;2.339;《相应部》1.172;《大品》9)等。共通的外在起因,则是由一万大梵天所围绕的娑婆世界主大梵天之劝请。经中亦云:“了知梵天之劝请已”(《长部》2.69;《中部》1.283;2.339;《相应部》1.179;《大品》9)。世尊在受到劝请后,止息了由审察法而生的少事之念,生起了说法之精勤。如同大悲心,十力智等也应视为说法之内在起因。因为世尊如实了知一切所知法及说法之方式,亦了知众生的志向、随眠等,以处非处等善巧,随应度者之志向,开展种种法门之教说。不共的起因,也依内在与外在之别,分为两种。其中,内在的即应知为彼。显示巴利原文
373. ‘‘Kasmā bhagavā idaṃ suttamabhāsī’’ti asādhāraṇaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati, sādhāraṇaṃ pana ‘‘pākaṭa’’nti anāmasitvā ‘‘kururaṭṭhavāsīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Samuṭṭhānanti hi desanānidānaṃ, taṃ sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhedato duvidhaṃ, sādhāraṇampi ajjhattikabāhirabhedato duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ ajjhattikaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ nāma bhagavato mahākaruṇā. Tāya hi samussāhitassa bhagavato veneyyānaṃ dhammadesanāya cittaṃ udapādi. Yathāha ‘‘sattesu ca kāruññataṃ paṭicca buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokesī’’tiādi. (Dī. ni. 2.69; ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 9) bāhiraṃ pana sādhāraṇaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ nāma dasasahassamahābrahmaparivārassa sahampatimahābrahmuno ajjhesanaṃ. Tathā cāha ‘‘brahmuno ca ajjhesanaṃ viditvā’’ti. (Dī. ni. 2.69; ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339; saṃ. ni. 1.179; mahāva. 9) tadajjhesanuttarakālañhi dhammapaccavekkhaṇājanitaṃ appossukkataṃ paṭipassambhetvā bhagavā dhammaṃ desetuṃ ussāhajāto ahosi. Yathā ca mahākaruṇā, evaṃ dasabalañāṇādayo ca desanāya ajjhattasamuṭṭhānabhāve vattabbā. Sabbañhi ñeyyadhammaṃ, tesaṃ desetabbappakāraṃ, sattānañca āsayānusayādiṃ yāthāvato jānitvā bhagavā ṭhānāṭṭhānādīsu kosallena veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vicittanayadesanaṃ pavattesīti. Asādhāraṇampi ajjhattikabāhirabhedato duvidhameva. Tattha ajjhattikaṃ yāya mahākaruṇāya, yena ca desanāñāṇena idaṃ suttaṃ pavattitaṃ, tadubhayaṃ veditabbaṃ, bāhiraṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘kururaṭṭhavāsīna’’ntiādimāha. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘asādhāraṇaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ pucchatī’’ti, tena ‘‘attajjhāsayādīsu catūsu suttanikkhepesu kataroya’’nti suttanikkhepo pucchito hotīti itaro ‘‘kururaṭṭhavāsīna’’ntiādinā ‘‘parajjhāsayoyaṃ suttanikkhepo’’ti dasseti.
据说,那时的俱卢国,由于彼处众生大多具备如理作意等而善修习,且依往昔所造福业之力,当时气候等条件亦极为圆满。故说“气候、资具等条件圆满”。“等”字含摄食物等圆满。另有一些人说:“由往昔所行俱卢正法之习气,如同北俱卢洲,大多时候气候等本即圆满,而于世尊之时,彼国更殊胜地具备气候适宜等条件。”“心身调适”指心与身之无病。“得助益之慧力”指获得资助之智能力,或一再累积修习之慧光。“于二十一处”:以身随观有十四处,以受随观有一处,以心随观有一处,以法随观有五处,如是共二十一处。“将业处投入阿罗汉果”:即把四谛业处以教说方式投入阿罗汉果,如同令其证得阿罗汉果一般。如同将茉莉花、瞻波花等各种花,以及宝珠、珍珠等七宝,放入金提篮或金箱中,因容器殊胜,花与宝珠便格外光彩,且因令人愉悦而能发挥作用;同样,世尊此教法,于戒、见等条件圆满、如同殊胜容器的俱卢国众中宣说,便更加光辉,且能发挥大作用。此即“譬如有人”等所表之义。“此处”指俱卢国。显示巴利原文
Kururaṭṭhaṃ kira tadā taṃnivāsisattānaṃ yonisomanasikāravantatādinā yebhuyyena suppaṭipannatāya, pubbe ca katapuññatābalena tadā utuādisampattiyuttameva ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘utupaccayādisampannattā’’ti. Ādi-saddena bhojanādisampattiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Keci pana ‘‘pubbe pavattakuruvattadhammānuṭṭhānavāsanāya uttarakuru viya yebhuyyena utuādisampannameva hontaṃ bhagavato kāle sātisayaṃ utusappāyādiyuttaṃ taṃ raṭṭhaṃ ahosī’’ti vadanti. Cittasarīrakallatāyāti cittassa, sarīrassa ca arogatāya. Anuggahitapaññābalāti laddhūpakārañāṇānubhāvā, anu anu vā āciṇṇapaññātejā. Ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesuti kāyānupassanāvasena cuddasasu ṭhānesu, vedanānupassanāvasena ekasmiṃ ṭhāne, tathā cittānupassanāvasena, dhammānupassanāvasena pañcasu ṭhānesūti evaṃ ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ yathā arahattaṃ pāpeti, evaṃ desanāvasena arahatte pakkhipitvā. Suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakasuvaṇṇamañjūsāsu pakkhittāni sumanacampakādinānāpupphāni, maṇimuttādisattaratanāni ca yathā bhājanasampattiyā savisesaṃ sobhanti, kiccakarāni ca honti manuññabhāvato, evaṃ sīladassanādisampattiyā bhājanavisesabhūtāya kururaṭṭhavāsiparisāya desitā bhagavato ayaṃ desanā bhiyyoso mattāya sobhati, kiccakārī ca hotīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yathā hi puriso’’tiādinā. Etthāti kururaṭṭhe.
“本来”指从其本性,即在此《念处经》教说之前亦已如此之意。“精勤修习而住”指随顺导师之教说,致力于修习而住。显示巴利原文
Pakatiyāti sarasatopi, imissā satipaṭṭhānasuttadesanāya pubbepīti adhippāyo. Anuyuttā viharanti satthu desanānusārato bhāvanānuyogaṃ.
“放逸之身”意为不应以放逸之心安住,即不将心投入无常等如理作意,反而耽着于色等所缘;应当舍弃放逸之住,以不放逸而住。这是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Vissaṭṭhaattabhāvenāti aniccādivasena kismiñci yonisomanasikāre cittaṃ aniyojetvā rūpādiārammaṇe abhirativasena vissaṭṭhacittena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭati, pamādavihāraṃ pahāya appamattena bhavitabbanti adhippāyo.
“一乘”(ekāyana)一词中,“乘”(ayana)这个字是“道”的同义词。不仅仅是“乘”,还有很多其他词也是“道”的同义词。为了解析这个词,在说了“道的……”等内容之后,针对“如果‘乘’是‘道’的同义词,为何又再说‘道’呢?”这一质难,而作出了“所以……”等回答。其中,“一道”即唯一之道,因为通往涅槃的道路并没有第二条。或许有人问:这里将念处说为道,可其他道法还有很多啊?确实如此,但那些法在说到念处时即已被包含,因为与念处不可分离。例如,智、精进等在广说时都会被收录,而总说时只提到“念”,这应看作随顺所度化者的意乐而作的安排。“非歧路”是说,此道既非许多条不同的路,也绝非不通涅槃之路。“独一”是指没有伴侣。没有伴侣有两种情况:一是无第二身作伴,名为“身远离”;二是无渴爱为伴,名为“心远离”。因此经中说“是身远离、心远离的”。在世间,最上的也被称为“独一的”。显示巴利原文
Ekāyanoti ettha ayana-saddo maggapariyāyo. Na kevalaṃ ayanameva, atha kho aññepi bahū maggapariyāyāti paduddhāraṃ karonto ‘‘maggassa hī’’ti ādiṃ vatvā yadi maggapariyāyo ayana-saddo, kasmā puna ‘‘maggo’’ti vuttanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Tattha ekamaggoti eko eva maggo. Na hi nibbānagāmimaggo añño atthīti. Nanu satipaṭṭhānaṃ idha maggoti adhippetaṃ, tadaññe ca bahū maggadhammā atthīti? Saccaṃ atthi, te pana satipaṭṭhānaggahaṇeneva gahitā tadavinābhāvato. Tathā hi ñāṇavīriyādayo niddese gahitā, uddese pana satiyā eva gahaṇaṃ veneyyajjhāsayavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Na dvidhāpathabhūto’’ti iminā imassa maggassa anekamaggabhāvābhāvaṃ viya anibbānagāmibhāvābhāvañca dasseti. Ekenāti asahāyena. Asahāyatā ca duvidhā attadutiyatābhāvena vā, yā ‘‘vūpakaṭṭhakāyatā’’ti vuccati, taṇhādutiyatābhāvena vā, yā ‘‘pavivittacittatā’’ti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘vūpakaṭṭhena pavivittacittenā’’ti. Seṭṭhopi loke ‘‘eko’’ti vuccati ‘‘yāva pare ekāhaṃ vo karomī’’tiādīsūti āha ‘‘ekassāti seṭṭhassā’’ti. Yadi saṃsārato nissaraṇaṭṭho ayanaṭṭho, aññesampi upanissayasampannānaṃ sādhāraṇato, kathaṃ bhagavatoti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ khoti ettha kho-saddo avadhāraṇe, tasmā imasmiṃ yevāti attho. Desanābhedoyeva heso, yadidaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti vā ‘‘ayano’’ti vā. Ayana-saddo vā kammakaraṇādivibhāgo. Tenāha ‘‘atthato pana eko vā’’ti.
“以种种门类的修行方式而运作”:这是指通过身随观等门类,其中又以入出息等具体门类,循这样的修行方式而运作。“一乘”意为通向独一之处,也就是通向涅槃的意思。涅槃因为无有第二、最为殊胜,所以用“一”来形容。正如经中所说:“真实唯一,没有第二。”(《经集》890)“诸比丘,在所有有为与无为法中,离贪被称为其中的最高峰。”(《增支部》4.34;《如是语》90)“灭尽本身即是终点”,因此称为灭尽的边际;已见到生的灭尽边际的人,就是“生灭尽的见者”。没有差别地对一切众生以利益来怜念,所以是“利益悲悯者”。“已渡过”就是已经越度了。“从前”指的是过去的诸佛,或者说从前过去的时间。显示巴利原文
Nānāmukhabhāvanānayappavattoti kāyānupassanādimukhena tatthāpi ānāpānādimukhena bhāvanānayena pavatto. Ekāyananti ekagāminaṃ, nibbānagāminanti attho. Nibbānañhi adutiyabhāvato, seṭṭhabhāvato ca ‘‘eka’’nti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘ekañhi saccaṃ na dutīyamatthī’’ti (su. ni. 890). ‘‘Yāvatā bhikkhave dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā virāgo tesaṃ aggaṃ akkhāyatī’’ti. (A. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) khayo eva antoti khayanto, jātiyā khayantaṃ diṭṭhavāti jātikhayantadassī. Avibhāgena sabbepi satte hitena anukampatīti hitānukampī. Atariṃsūti tariṃsu. Pubbeti purimakā buddhā, pubbe vā atītakāle.
“彼”(taṃ)指他们的言辞,又或者,它不应被理解为动作语的作用。因为以数量为根本,一个表达“众生”的词,并不具备动作语说明的功能。正如“或一次上升”(《增支部》7.72)等例所示,应当用“一次之乘”(sakiṃ ayana)这样的措辞。所谓“如是结合义”,即是以“它有单一的乘”来解释这一复合词的意义。前一种方式与后一种方式谓为“两方”。这并不合理,因为此处所指之道可多次生起。故问“为何?”等。“多次亦乘”显示前一种方式不合理,“其乘亦多”则显示后一种方式不合理。显示巴利原文
Tanti tesaṃ vacanaṃ, taṃ vā kiriyāvuttivācakattaṃ na yujjati. Na hi saṅkheyyappadhānatāya sattavācino ekasaddassa kiriyāvuttivācakatā atthi. ‘‘Sakimpi uddhaṃ gaccheyyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.72) viya sakiṃ ayanoti iminā byañjanena bhavitabbaṃ. Evamatthaṃ yojetvāti ‘‘ekaṃ ayanaṃ assā’’ti evaṃ samāsapadatthaṃ yojetvā. Ubhayathāpīti purimanayena, pacchimanayena ca. Na yujjati idhādhippetamaggassa anekavāraṃ pavattisabbhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. ‘‘Anekavārampi ayatī’’ti purimanayassa ayuttatādassanaṃ, ‘‘anekañcassa ayanaṃ hotī’’ti pacchimanayassa.
“于此句”:是指在“诸比丘,此一乘道”这一语句中,或是在“前分道、出世间道”这一安立句中。“混合道”:指与世间道相杂的出世间道。为了将清净等无差别因统摄在内,阿阇梨长老说“混合道”。另一方则以差别为因,此处所指的是前分道,因此称其为“前分道”。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃpadeti ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ bhikkhave maggo’’ti imasmiṃ vākye, imasmiṃ vā ‘‘pubbabhāgamaggo, lokuttaramaggo’’ti vidhānapade. Missakamaggoti lokiyena missako lokuttaramaggo . Visuddhiādīnaṃ nippariyāyahetukaṃ saṅgaṇhanto ācariyatthero ‘‘missakamaggo’’ti āha. Itaro pariyāyahetu idhādhippetoti ‘‘pubbabhāgamaggo’’ti avoca.
“听到声音”:即亲耳听闻,或辗转听到“尊者,是听法之时”的报时声。“如此举起”:意即,他们并不丢弃这“善妙、悦意”的法谈,如同扛起甘蔗捆那样举持而行,而非四处游荡。“混乱”:指被扰乱、变得纷杂,这便是它的意思。所谓“一乘道”,被称为前分念处道。至此,此处所意指的意义已经成就。为了庄严其义,并显示那前分道,如“八支道”等偈颂也是引自《无碍解道》而安立的。显示巴利原文
Saddaṃ sutvāti ‘‘kālo bhante dhammasavanāyā’’ti kālārocanasaddaṃ paccakkhato, paramparāya ca sutvā. Evaṃ ukkhipitvāti evaṃ ‘‘sundaraṃ manoharaṃ imaṃ kathaṃ chaḍḍemā’’ti achaḍḍentā ucchubhāraṃ viya paggahetvā na vicaranti. Āluḷetīti viluḷito ākulo hotīti attho. Ekāyanamaggo vuccati pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggoti ettāvatā idhādhippetatthe siddhe tasseva alaṅkāratthaṃ so pana yassa pubbabhāgamaggo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko’’tiādikā gāthāpi paṭisambhidāmaggatova ānetvā ṭhapitā.
“以趣向涅槃义”:以此道趣向、证得涅槃,故称“趣向涅槃”;此即是其无颠倒的自性之义。依于此趣向涅槃义,即指其作为证得涅槃的方法之义。“以应被寻求义”:由于应当被探寻。“或以‘应被前往义’”(异读),意为应当被达至。此处所说“贪等”,是依据“贪是垢,嗔是垢,痴是垢”(《分别论》924)之文,即指贪嗔痴。而举出“贪欲、邪贪等”,则是为摄一切随烦恼而特别列出的。为显示前已宣说的“为众生清净”一句的必然义,乃说“如是”等文。“清净”虽是总说,但为显明此处指心清净,故又说“依色垢等”。这不仅是注释书之说,经中即于此处直接宣说;为表明此意,乃说“如是”等。显示巴利原文
Nibbānagamanaṭṭhenāti nibbānaṃ gacchati adhigacchati etenāti nibbānagamanaṃ,soyeva aviparītasabhāvatāya attho, tena nibbānagamanaṭṭhena, nibbānādhigamūpāyatāyāti attho. Magganīyaṭṭhenāti gavesitabbatāya. ‘‘Gamanīyaṭṭhenā’’ti vā pāṭho, upagantabbatāyāti attho. ‘‘Rāgādīhī’’ti iminā rāgadosamohānaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ ‘‘rāgo malaṃ, doso malaṃ, moho mala’’nti (vibha. 924) vacanato. ‘‘Abhijjhāvisamalobhādīhī’’ti pana iminā sabbesampi upakkilesānaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ te visuṃ uddhaṭā. ‘‘Sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti vuttassa atthassa ekantikataṃ dassento ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādimāha. Kāmaṃ ‘‘visuddhiyā’’ti sāmaññajotanā, cittasseva pana visuddhi idhādhippetāti dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpamalavasena panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na kevalaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanameva, atha kho idaṃ ettha āhacca bhāsitanti dassento ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādimāha.
当此心清净成就时,因其能导向愁等的不再生起,故说“为超越愁、悲”等。其中,“愁”:以亲属遭遇灾祸等为因,内心热恼、内心焦灼。“悲”:亦以亲属遭遇灾祸等为因,陷于愁后,发出“我独子在何处?我独子在何处?”(《中部》2.353,354;《相应部》2.63)等的悲泣,是言语的散乱,即哀号、悲叹。在此,“超越”指未来不再生起,故说“为断除”。为以例示显示此超越的功用,乃说“因为此……”等。显示巴利原文
Sā panāyaṃ cittavisuddhi sijjhamānā yasmā sokādīnaṃ anuppādāya saṃvattati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādi. Tattha socanaṃ ñātibyasanādinimittaṃ cetaso santāpo antonijjhānaṃ soko. Ñātibyasanādinimittameva sokāvatiṇṇato ‘‘kahaṃ ekaputtaka kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.353, 354; saṃ. ni. 2.63) paridevanavasena vācāvippalāpo paridavanaṃ paridevo. Āyatiṃ anuppajjanaṃ idha samatikkamoti āha ‘‘pahānāyā’’ti. Taṃ panassa samatikkamāvahataṃ nidassanavasena dassento ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādimāha.
其中,“过去所有,令彼清净”:即令过去诸蕴的爱欲染污清净。“后”:指未来。“汝”:你的。“莫有”:不要有。“所有物”:指贪等所执之物,此即令未来诸蕴的染污清净。“中间”:指介于两者之间的现在。“若你不执取”:如果你不执取,即指在现在诸蕴相续中,令执取的作用止息。“汝将寂静而行”:如此,当三时所涉的染污悉皆清净时,便灭除一切热恼,成为寂静而住。以此阿罗汉果之极顶结束此偈。故说“此偈”等。显示巴利原文
Tattha yaṃ pubbe, taṃ visodhehīti atītesu khandhesu taṇhāsaṃkilesavisodhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Pacchāti parato . Teti tuyhaṃ. Māhūti mā ahu. Kiñcananti rāgādikiñcanaṃ, etena anāgatesu khandhesu saṃkilesavisodhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Majjheti tadubhayavemajjhe. No ce gahessasīti na upādiyissasi ce, etena paccuppanne khandhappabandhe upādānappavatti vuttā. Upasanto carissasīti evaṃ addhattayagatasaṃkilesavisodhane sati nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya upasanto hutvā viharissasīti arahattanikūṭena gāthaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Tenāha ‘‘imaṃ gātha’’ntiādi.
“儿子”:指亲生儿子,以及任何收养、名义上的儿子等。“父亲”:指生父,或其他如父者。“亲戚”:指亲属。此处意思是:对于被死神、被死亡侵袭、征服的人,儿子、父亲或亲戚都无法从死亡中救护。为什么呢?因为在亲属之中本无救护可得。依靠亲属的力量,并不能从死亡中获得保护。因此,世尊对波吒左罗说了“两个儿子死了”(《譬喻》长老尼1.498)等偈,意在让她不要徒然悲叹,而要如实见法,这就是佛陀的用意。她“安立于入流果”:当次第相应的无上法教结束时,她便安立于以千种方式庄严的须陀洹果。那么,她如何依此念处之道安立入流果呢?所以说“然而因为……”等。确实,若没有四谛业处的开示,弟子不可能证得圣道。而“闻此偈”等之所以这样说,是因为那首为消除忧愁而说的偈颂她最先听到,并且那也是围绕四谛而说、谈无常的法。其他的偈颂就更不必说了。“修习”:是指慧的修习,这里所指的即是这个。“因此”:因为对色法等以无常等随观也就是念处的修习,所以这样说。“他们”:指三亚提大臣、波吒左罗等也是如此。显示巴利原文
Puttāti orasā, aññepi vā dinnakakittimādayo ye keci. Pitāti janako, aññepi vā pituṭṭhāniyā. Bandhavāti ñātakā. Ayañhettha attho – puttā vā pitā vā bandhavā vā antakena maccunā adhipannassa abhibhūtassa maraṇato tāṇāya na honti. Kasmā? Natthi ñātīsu tāṇatāti. Na hi ñātīnaṃ vasena maraṇato ārakkhā atthi, tasmā paṭācāre ‘‘ubho puttā kālaṅkatā’’tiādinā (apa. therī 1.498) mā niratthakaṃ paridevi, dhammaṃyeva pana yāthāvato passāti adhippāyo. Sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitāti yathānulomaṃ pavattitāya sāmukkaṃsikāya dhammadesanāya pariyosāne sahassanayapaṭimaṇḍite sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ satipaṭṭhānamaggavasena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsīti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Na hi catusaccakammaṭṭhānakathāya vinā sāvakānaṃ ariyamaggādhigamo atthi. ‘‘Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā’’ti panidaṃ sokavinodanavasena pavattitāya gāthāya paṭhamaṃ sutattā vuttaṃ, sāpi hi saccadesanāya parivārabandhā eva aniccatākathāti katvā. Itaragāthāyaṃ pana vattabbameva natthi. Bhāvanāti paññābhāvanā. Sā hi idha adhippetā. Tasmāti yasmā rūpādīnaṃ aniccādito anupassanāpi satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāva, tasmā. Tepīti santatimahāmattapaṭācārāpi.
“五百贼”:他依次派出五批贼,每批各带一百名随从,他们进入森林寻找长老,逐渐来到长老附近。所以说“他们去后,围绕着长老而坐”。“镇伏受”:通过不作意,排除大腿骨折断所引发的苦受。由于毫无懊悔,欢悦便生起。因此说“依止清净的戒”。长老在忆念自己的戒时,依清净之戒,生起广大欢悦,镇伏了骨折所带来的苦受。“三整夜”:此为持续相关的受格,表示他在修观中不放逸,并策励精进。“足”:脚。“我将控制”:我将使其调柔,使之了知。“厌恶”:我感到厌离。“惭耻”:我感到羞愧。“观见”:我完全洞见。显示巴利原文
Pañcasatecoreti satasatacoraparivāre pañcacore paṭipāṭiyā pesesi, te araññaṃ pavisitvā theraṃ pariyesantā anukkamena therassa samīpe samāgacchiṃsu. Tenāha ‘‘te gantvā theraṃ parivāretvā nisīdiṃsū’’ti. Vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvāti ūruṭṭhibhedapaccayaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ amanasikārena vinodetvā. Pītipāmojjaṃ uppajji vippaṭisāralesassapi asambhavato. Tenāha ‘‘parisuddhaṃ sīlaṃ nissāyā’’ti. Therassa hi sīlaṃ paccavekkhato parisuddhaṃ sīlaṃ nissāya uḷāraṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjamānaṃ ūruṭṭhibhedajanitaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ vikkhambhesi. Tiyāmarattinti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ, tenassa vipassanāyaṃ appamādaṃ, paṭipattiussukkāpanañca dasseti. Pādānīti pāde. Saṃyamessāmīti saññapessāmi, saññattiṃ karissāmīti attho. Aṭṭiyāmīti jigucchāmi. Harāyāmīti lajjāmi. Vipassisanti sampassiṃ.
“打瞌睡者”:指打瞌睡、进入睡眠的人。“非行境”:指不应去的地方。“具足行者”:指具足头陀功德的人。“放逸”:是针对打瞌睡而说的。“心被阻碍者”:指增上心受到阻碍的人。“在笼中”:是指在身体之中。身体由于筋腱的连结和骨骼的框架,因此这里称为“笼”。显示巴利原文
Pacalāyantānanti pacalāyikānaṃ niddaṃ upagatānaṃ. Agatinti agocaraṃ. Vatasampannoti dhutaguṇasampanno. Pamādanti pacalāyanaṃ sandhāyāha. Oruddhamānasoti uparuddhaadhicitto. Pañjarasminti sarīre. Sarīrañhi nhārusambandhaaṭṭhisaṅghāṭatāya idha ‘‘pañjara’’nti vuttaṃ.
“黄衣力士”:因为他曾用黄旗裹身,又绘有力士角斗图,故称“黄衣力士”,出家后即成为黄衣力士长老。“于三王国”指般度、朱罗、哥罗这三个王国。他因“一切力士皆在铜掌岛得到尊敬”的说法而来到铜掌岛。“将那作为钩”:根据《非汝所有经》中“色等不应执为‘我的’”所阐明的道理,以此为钩,调伏自己那如象的心。“当脚不能承载时”:因过度经行,双脚无力支撑行走,便以膝经行;因为一旦坐下,恐会昏睡过去。“由记说”:为了显示自己精进用功的成果、鼓舞同梵行者,故此讲说他人的事迹。“所言”即话语,为谁所说?乃“最胜佛,世间最上者”所说。“非汝所有”等语句,示现其运作的情形。为阐明“这于我乃是彻底止息诸行的原因”,他引“诸行无常”的偈颂,以此表示:我如今已无那种刹那坏灭的“病”,成为无病的般涅槃者。显示巴利原文
Pītavaṇṇāya pana paṭākāya kāyaṃ pariharaṇato, mallayuddhacittakatāya ca ‘‘pītamallo’’ti paññāto pabbajitvā pītamallatthero nāma jāto. Tīsu rajjesūti paṇḍucoḷagoḷarajjesu. ‘‘Sabbamallā sīhaḷadīpe sakkārasammānaṃ labhantī’’ti tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ āgamma. Taṃyeva aṅkusaṃ katvāti ‘‘rūpādayo ‘mamā’ti na gahetabbā’’ti natumhākavaggena pakāsitamatthaṃ attano cittamattahatthino aṅkusaṃ katvā. Pādesu avahantesūti ativelaṃ caṅkamanena akkamituṃ asamatthesu. Jaṇṇukehi caṅkamati ‘‘nisinne niddāya avasaro hotī’’ti. Byākaritvāti attano vīriyārambhassa saphalatāpavedanamukhena sabrahmacārīnaṃ tattha ussāhaṃ janento aññaṃ byākaritvā. Bhāsitanti vacanaṃ, kassa pana tanti āha ‘‘buddhaseṭṭhassa sabbalokaggavādino’’ti. ‘‘Na tumhāka’’ntiādi tassa pavattiākāradassanaṃ. Tayidaṃ me saṅkhārānaṃ accantavūpasamakāraṇanti dassento ‘‘aniccā vatā’’ti gāthamāhari, tena idānāhaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇe khaṇe bhaṅgasaṅkhātassa rogassa abhāvena arogo parinibbutoti dasseti.
“他的”指帝释的,“转生”指天界转生。他是以帝释身转生,故后来又恢复如常。显示巴利原文
Assāti sakkassa. Upapattīti devūpapatti. Puna pākatikāva ahosi sakkabhāveneva upapannattā.
“苏梵天”是这位天神的名字。他见到天女们堕入地狱,从此以后,针对内心持续生起的恐惧,而说出“此心常怀恐惧”等语。此处,“惊恐”指害怕、受惊吓;“悚惧”指震动不安。或者说“惊恐”是震动,“悚惧”是因怖畏连同所依一起动摇。“于未生起者”指未来之事;“于应作之事”指各自应做之事。有的版本作“于苦难”,意为在苦中,此处是依处格表示原因,即未来苦之因。“于已生起者”指已经生起的应作之事,如此连接。这是他就自己随从所遭受的苦而说的。显示巴利原文
Subrahmāti evaṃnāmo. Accharānaṃ nirayūpapattiṃ disvā tato pabhuti satataṃ pavattamānaṃ attano cittutrāsaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘niccaṃ utrastamidaṃ citta’’ntiādi. Tattha utrastanti santastaṃ bhītaṃ . Ubbigganti saṃviggaṃ. Utrastanti vā saṃviggaṃ. Ubbigganti bhayavasena saha nissayena sañcalitaṃ. Anuppannesūti anāgatesu. Kiccesūti tesu tesu itikattabbesu. ‘‘Kicchesū’’ti vā pāṭho, dukkhesūti attho, nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ, bhāvidukkhanimittanti attho. Uppatitesūti uppannesu kiccesūti yojanā. Tadā attano parivārassa uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ sandhāya vadati.
「能觉者」:从觉悟而言,即指圣道。而“除……外”一词是就“觉悟”来说的,意为“除觉悟之外”。对其余诸词,也应以同样的方式理解。「以苦行」:由苦行的修习而言,以此显示作为证得圣道方法的严苛行持。「以根律仪」:由防护包括意根在内的六根而说,据此以念防护为首,开显一切防护戒;或以相摄持的方法,开显一切四遍清净戒。「以一切舍离」:由舍弃一切、断除一切烦恼而说。因为烦恼舍离之时,业轮转与异熟轮转也就随之舍离。「安稳」:即安全、无灾患的状态。显示巴利原文
Bojjhāti bodhito, ariyamaggatoti attho. ‘‘Aññatrā’’ti ca padaṃ apekkhitvā nissakkavacanaṃ, bodhiṃ ṭhapetvāti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tapasāti tapokammato, tena maggādhigamassa upāyabhūtaṃ sallekhapaṭipadaṃ dasseti. Indriyasaṃvarāti manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ saṃvaraṇato , etena satisaṃvarasīsena sabbampi saṃvarasīlaṃ, lakkhaṇahāranayena vā sabbampi catupārisuddhisīlaṃ dasseti. Sabbanissaggāti sabbassapi nissajjanato sabbakilesappahānato. Kilesesu hi nissaṭṭhesu kammavaṭṭaṃ, vipākavaṭṭañca nissaṭṭhameva hotīti. Sotthinti khemaṃ anupaddavataṃ.
「理趣」:由能决定地趣向涅槃,或依此能了知、证悟涅槃,故称为理趣,也就是圣道,因此说“理趣被称为八支圣道”。「离渴爱之缚的状态」:即远离了称为渴爱的缚。因为渴爱使蕴与蕴相缚、业与果相缚、众生与苦相缚,使之交织、结缚,所以称为“缚”。此缚不存在,即涅槃中无缚;或者证得涅槃的人没有缚,故称为涅槃,即无为界。「作证」是不依他缘而亲自证知,所以说“以自证”。显示巴利原文
Ñāyati nicchayena kamati nibbānaṃ, taṃ vā ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati etenāti ñāyo, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘ñāyo vuccati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti. Taṇhāvānavirahitattāti taṇhāsaṅkhātavānavivittattā. Taṇhā hi khandhehi khandhaṃ, kammunā phalaṃ, sattehi ca dukkhaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti ‘‘vāna’’nti vuccati, tayidaṃ natthi ettha vānaṃ, na vā etasmiṃ adhigate puggalassa vānanti nibbānaṃ, asaṅkhatā dhātu. Parappaccayena vinā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sacchikiriyāti āha ‘‘attapaccakkhatāyā’’ti.
既然“以清净”就是指心清净,那么说到“清净”时,超越愁等也就已经包含在内了,为什么还要再单独提出呢?为遣此问,故说“在那里,虽然……”等语。「通达教理者」:指对于四圣谛、缘起等法理通达善巧的人。「使了知各各义理」:世尊依自己的说法善巧,针对所化众生中,应以略说、广说等方式而令觉悟者,随宜说法,令他们各自觉悟,从而了知各个义理。「将其各各显明而显示」:即不借助义准等方式,直接将其义理清楚明白地显示出来。因为正自觉者绝不会说需要依义准等才能成立的话。「引生」:是生起、成为的意思。因为一个尚未超越愁叹的人,绝不可能有心清净,心清净正是由超越愁叹而达成的,所以讲“由超越愁叹而生起”。又因为被忧的所缘及苦法所触的凡夫,会被愁等所制伏;而当他遍知这些苦法时,愁等就不会生起,所以说“超越愁叹即因苦与忧的灭没”。「理趣」:指最上道,也指第三道。因为依次证得这些道,就能相应地灭没苦与忧。其他的现观虽然与作证现观同时生起,但因彼此不可分离,所以说是以作证现观为因。所谓“证得理趣为涅槃作证”,是就果智而说。显示巴利原文
Nanu ‘‘visuddhiyā’’ti cittavisuddhiyā adhippetattā visuddhiggahaṇenevettha sokasamatikkamādayopi gahitā eva honti, te puna kasmā gahitāti anuyogaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāsanayuttikovideti saccapaṭiccasamuppādādilakkhaṇāyaṃ dhammanītiyaṃ cheke. Taṃ tamatthaṃñāpetīti ye ye bodhaneyyapuggalā saṅkhepavitthārādivasena yathā yathā bodhetabbā, attano desanāvilāsena bhagavā te te tathā tathā bodhento taṃ tamatthaṃ ñāpeti. Taṃ taṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassentoti atthāpattiṃ agaṇento taṃ tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento. Na hi sammāsambuddho atthāpattiñāpakādisādhanīyavacanāti. Saṃvattatīti jāyati, hotīti attho. Yasmā anatikkantasokaparidevassa na kadāci cittavisuddhi atthi sokaparidevasamatikkamanamukheneva cittavisuddhiyā ijjhanato, tasmā āha ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamena hotī’’ti. Yasmā pana domanassapaccayehi dukkhadhammehi phuṭṭhaṃ puthujjanaṃ sokādayo abhibhavanti, pariññātesu ca tesu te na honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamo dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamenā’’ti. Ñāyassāti aggamaggassa, tatiyamaggassa ca. Tadadhigamena hi yathākkamaṃ dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamo. Sacchikiriyābhisamayasahabhāvīpi itarābhisamayo tadavinābhāvato sacchikiriyābhisamayahetuko viya vutto. Ñāyassādhigamo nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyāti phalañāṇena vā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, ‘‘nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti sampadānavacanañcetaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「称赞语」(Vaṇṇabhaṇana)即赞叹的语言。这种说法不止用于此处,在其他地方也为大师所常用,以此说明而引用了“yatheva hi……”等语句。其中,「初善」(ādikalyāṇaṃ)指开头是善的,或者以初为善。其余两词也依此类推。「义善」(sātthaṃ)指由于具足意义而善。「文善」(sabyañjanaṃ)指由于具足文句而善。由于戒等五法蕴圆满,且没有需再添加的,所以是「完全圆满」(kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ)。由于远离随烦恼,且没有需再去除的,所以是「清净」(parisuddhaṃ)。由最殊胜的修行,所以是「教梵行」(sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ)以及「道梵行」(maggabrahmacariyaṃ),我将宣说。这是简要说明,详细内容应按《清净道论》所述来理解。「圣种」(Ariyavaṃsā)指诸圣者、诸佛等的种姓与传承。「知为最上」(Aggaññā)即应知道这是最上的,因为它在一切种姓中最为殊胜。「知为久住」(Rattaññā)即应知道这是久远的。「知为种姓」(Vaṃsaññā)即应知道这是诸佛等的种姓。「古旧」(Porāṇā)即远古的,不是新近的。「不杂」(Asaṅkiṇṇā)即不散乱、没有被除去。「未曾杂」(Asaṅkiṇṇapubbā)即过去从未被圣者以“这些有什么用”而除去。「现在不杂」(Na saṅkīyanti)即现在圣者们也不除去它们。「未来不杂」(Na saṅkīyissanti)即未来也不会被除去。「不被智者呵责」(Appaṭikuṭṭhā … pe … viññūhi)即不被世间有智慧的沙门婆罗门所舍弃、诽谤或呵责。「以“以清净”等」(‘Visuddhiyā’tiādīhi)指通过表达清净等意思的语句。「以词句」(Padehi)即通过表示清净、义利等不同方面的法句。「灾祸」(Upaddave)即非义、不利。「清净」(Visuddhiṃ)指净化、断除染污。背诵(Vācuggatakaraṇaṃ)、熟悉(Pariyāpuṇanaṃ)、置义于心(Atthassa hadaye ṭhapanaṃ)、受持(Dhāraṇaṃ)、读诵(Parivattanaṃ)。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇabhaṇananti pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Tayidaṃ na idheva, atha kho aññatthāpi satthu āciṇṇaṃ evāti dassento ‘‘yatheva hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ādimhi kalyāṇamādi vā kalyāṇaṃ etassāti ādikalyāṇaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhapāripūrito, upanetabbassa abhāvato ca kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Nirupakkilesato apanetabbassa ca abhāvato parisuddhaṃ. Seṭṭhacariyabhāvato sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ, maggabrahmacariyañca vo pakāsessāmīti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.147) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ariyavaṃsāti ariyānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ vaṃsā paveṇiyo. Aggaññāti aggāti jānitabbā sabbavaṃsehi seṭṭhabhāvato. Rattaññāti cirarattāti jānitabbā. Vaṃsaññāti buddhādīnaṃ vaṃsāti jānitabbā. Porāṇāti purātanā anadhunātanattā. Asaṅkiṇṇāti avikiṇṇā anapanītā. Asaṅkiṇṇapubbāti ‘‘kiṃ imehī’’ti ariyehi na apanītapubbā . Na saṅkīyantīti idānipi tehi na apanīyanti. Na saṅkīyissantīti anāgatepi tehi na apanīyissanti. Appaṭikuṭṭhā…pe… viññūhīti ye loke viññū samaṇabrāhmaṇā, tehi appaccakkhatā aninditā, agarahitāti attho. ‘‘Visuddhiyā’’tiādīhīti visuddhiādidīpanehi. Padehīti vākyehi, visuddhiatthatādibhedabhinnehi vā dhammakoṭṭhāsehi. Upaddaveti anatthe. Visuddhinti visujjhanaṃ saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Pariyāpuṇanaṃ paricayo. Atthassa hadaye ṭhapanaṃ dhāraṇaṃ. Parivattanaṃ vācanaṃ.
“犍陀罗”,指生于犍陀罗国之物。“能”,谓具有能力。“非出离道”,指邪道,或是决定为邪性、未决定为邪性之道。“金”,亦指伪金。“珠”,亦指玻璃珠;“珍珠”,亦指竹珠;“珊瑚”,亦指嫩枝。因此,以“红阎浮金”等词加以简别。显示巴利原文
Gandhārakoti gandhāradese uppanno. Pahontīti sakkonti. Aniyyānikamaggāti micchāmaggā, micchattaniyatāniyatamaggāpi vā. Suvaṇṇanti kūṭasuvaṇṇampi vuccati. Maṇīti kācamaṇipi, muttāti veḷujāpi, pavāḷanti pallavopi vuccatīti rattajambunadādipadehi te visesitā.
“不在其下”:此处意就所执取之身等而言,因其下方的蕴等并无受等自性,且身、心、受解脱之三地法,被各别执为颠倒依处,故说在下位的执取中,颠倒依处不可得立。而说“不在其上”,则是因为第五颠倒依处并不存在。此处,念处之分,依所缘而别。“三念处”一句,是为显示“念处”一词的义理分析,并非阐明此经藏中所说“念处”一词的涵义。“于……等中,以念为境”:句中“等”字,包含了显示有相所缘——所谓“念处”——的经文段落,如“触集故受集,名色集故心集,作意集故法集”等等。同样,举《无碍解道》等,也是为了显示其他经文段落的目的。“念之安立处”,即念应安住之处。但是,当人们行布施等时,色等也会成为念的所缘;为遮止此义,故说“最胜安立处”。显示巴利原文
Na tato heṭṭhāti idhādhippetakāyādīnaṃ vedanādisabhāvattābhāvā, kāyavedanācittavimuttassa tebhūmakadhammassa visuṃ vipallāsavatthantarabhāvena gahitattā ca heṭṭhā gahaṇesu vipallāsavatthūnaṃ aniṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, pañcamassa pana vipallāsavatthuno abhāvā ‘‘na uddha’’nti āha. Ārammaṇavibhāgena hettha satipaṭṭhānavibhāgoti. Tayo satipaṭṭhānāti satipaṭṭhāna-saddassa atthuddhāradassanaṃ, na idha pāḷiyaṃ vuttassa satipaṭṭhāna-saddassa atthadassananti. Ādīsu hi satigocaroti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘phassasamudayā vedanānaṃ samudayo, nāmarūpasamudayā cittassa samudayo, manasikārasamudayā dhammānaṃ samudayo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.408) ‘‘satipaṭṭhānā’’ti vuttānaṃ sabhigocarānaṃ pakāsake suttappadese saṅgaṇhāti. Evaṃ ‘‘paṭisambhidāpāḷiya’’mpi (paṭi. ma. 2.34) avasesapāḷippadesadassanattho ādi-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Satiyā paṭṭhānanti satiyā patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Dānādīni karontassa rūpādīni satiyā ṭhānaṃ hontīti taṃnivāraṇatthamāha ‘‘padhānaṃ ṭhāna’’nti. Pa-saddo hi idha ‘‘paṇītā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. saṃ. mātikā 14) viya padhānatthadīpakoti adhippāyo.
“圣者”,在此处是指那位圣者、一切众生中最尊贵的正自觉者。“于此”,是指这部《六处分别经》。实际上,这是以经的一部分来指称整部经。在这部经中——显示巴利原文
Ariyoti ariyaṃ sabbasattaseṭṭhaṃ sammāsambuddhamāha. Etthāti etasmiṃ saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasutte.(Ma. ni. 3.310) suttekadesena hi suttaṃ dasseti. Tattha hi –
“有三念处,是圣者所修习……乃至……是阿拉汉所应修习。”那么,这句话是依什么因缘而说的呢?诸比丘,世间有导师,出于慈悯、为利益安乐,依慈悯而为弟子们说法:“这是为了你们的利益,这是为了你们的快乐。”然而,他的弟子们不愿听受,不倾耳细听,也不用心作意,反而背离导师的教诫而行。诸比丘,在此情形下,如来不会因此而不悦,也不会领受不悦的感受;他安住于无漏,正念正知。诸比丘,这是第一念处,是圣者所修习……乃至……是阿拉汉所应修习。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo…pe… arahatīti iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ, kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ. Idha, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṃ upādāya ‘idaṃ vo hitāya idaṃ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti. Na sotaṃ odahanti, na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthu sāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Yadariyo sevati…pe… arahati.
再者,诸比丘,导师……乃至……“这是为了你们的快乐。”那时,一部分弟子不愿听受……乃至……但也不背离导师的教诫而行。诸比丘,在此情形下,如来既不会不悦,也不会领受不悦;既不会喜悦,也不会领受喜悦;他超越了不悦与喜悦两者,安住于舍,正念正知。诸比丘,这称为第二念处。显示巴利原文
Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, satthā…pe...idaṃ vo sukhāyāti . Tassa ekacce sāvakā na sussūsanti…pe… na ca vokkamma satthu sāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, na ca attamano hoti, na ca attamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, anattamanatā ca attamanatā ca tadubhayaṃ abhinivajjetvā upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, dutiyaṃ.
再者,诸比丘,……乃至……‘这是为了快乐。’他的弟子们愿意听闻……乃至……依教奉行。诸比丘,在此,如来内心喜悦,也感受喜悦,并且安住于无漏、具念、正知。诸比丘,这称为第三念处。显示巴利原文
Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave…pe… sukhāyāti, tassa sāvakā sussūsanti…pe… vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato attamano ceva hoti, attamanatañca paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, tatiya’’nti (ma. ni. 3.311).
如此,由于对贪与嗔的无漏,以及恒常现起念,超越了那两者,故说为‘念处’。事实上,只有诸佛才恒常现起念,因为这是不共法,独觉佛等则不具备。前缀‘pa-’表示开始,开始即是转起,因此说‘应使之转起’的意思。以念为工具而安立之处,即应安立念之处,是为念处。因为前缀‘ana-’通常既作行为名词,也有工具义;同样也可获得主动者义,故说‘paṭṭhāti(安立)即 paṭṭhāna(处)’。在‘安立’一词中,前缀‘pa-’表示强力跳入,故说‘跳入、冲入、扩展而转起’的意思。再者,为了解释念一词和处一词的主动者义,又说‘或者’等,由此可知前一种解释中,念一词和处一词都是主动者义。念的意义是通过忆念,即对久远所作和久远所说之事的随念。此即所谓‘念即是念处’,正是此经句中所指的含义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭighānunayehi anavassutatā, niccaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya tadubhayavītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttā. Buddhānaṃyeva hi niccaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitā hoti āveṇikadhammabhāvato, na paccekabuddhādīnaṃ. Pa-saddo ārambhaṃ joteti, ārambho ca pavattīti katvā āha ‘‘pavattayitabbatoti attho’’ti. Satiyā karaṇabhūtāya paṭṭhānaṃ paṭṭhapetabbaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Ana-saddo hi bahulaṃvacanena kammatthopi hotīti. Tathāssa kattuatthopi labbhatīti ‘‘paṭṭhātīti paṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṭṭhātīti ettha pa-saddo bhusatthavisiṭṭhaṃ pakkhandanaṃ dīpetīti ‘‘okkanditvā pakkhanditvā pattharitvā pavattatīti attho’’ti āha. Puna bhāvatthaṃ sati, saddaṃ, paṭṭhānasaddañca vaṇṇento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha, tena purimavikappe sati, saddo, paṭṭhāna-saddo ca kattuatthoti viññāyati. Saraṇaṭṭhenāti cirakatassa, cirabhāsitassa ca anussaraṇaṭṭhena. Idanti yaṃ ‘‘satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, idaṃ. Idha imasmiṃ suttapadese adhippetaṃ.
如果那样的话,即如果念本身就是念处,而念只是一个法,既然如此,为什么说‘念处’是复数呢?答:‘因为念有多种。’如果说那些念是多种,那为什么‘道’是单数呢?这是语句关联上的问题。答:道是就其含义而言的,即‘导出’的含义。因为导出的法就是道法;正是由于这种导出的性质,它获得了单一性,完全地趋向涅槃,而追求它的人为了那个目的而寻求道。因此说‘正如所说’,这是在引用自己先前说过的话。在这里,这四种念也就是以身随观等方式区分的四种念。在后面的圣道刹那,当它们正在成就其作用时:在前行部分,对于身等,通过破除净想等方式,它们是各别各别地转起的;而到了圣道刹那,念本身就在那里断除了这四种颠倒,以作涅槃为所缘的方式趋向涅槃。正是因为成就了这四种作用,所以这里才用复数来表达‘念处’。而这样,对于念,由于道在含义上的单一性,就用单数说为‘道’;由于所缘的不同而有四种性,所以也说‘四’,这是因为有如此说法的必要。为了用比喻来说明显示巴利原文
Yadi evanti. Yadi sati eva satipaṭṭhānaṃ, sati nāma eko dhammo, evaṃ sante kasmā ‘‘satipaṭṭhānā’’ti bahuvacananti āha ‘‘satibahuttā’’tiādi. Yadi bahukā tā satiyo, atha kasmā ‘‘maggo’’ti ekavacananti yojanā. Maggaṭṭhenāti niyyānaṭṭhena. Niyyāniko hi maggadhammo, teneva niyyānikabhāvena ekattūpagato ekantato nibbānaṃ gacchati, atthikehi ca tadatthaṃ maggīyatīti āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’nti, attanāva pubbe vuttaṃ paccāharati. Tattha catassopi cetāti kāyānupassanādivasena catubbidhāpi ca etā satiyo. Aparabhāgeti ariyamaggakkhaṇe. Kiccaṃ sādhayamānāti pubbabhāge kāyādīsu subhasaññādividhamanavasena visuṃ visuṃ pavattitvā maggakkhaṇe satiyeva tattha catubbidhassapi vipallāsassa samucchedavasena pahānakiccaṃ sādhayamānā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena nibbānaṃ gacchati. Catukiccasādhaneneva hettha bahuvacananiddeso. Evañca satīti evaṃ maggaṭṭhena ekattaṃ upādāya ‘‘maggo’’ti ekavacanena, ārammaṇabhedena catubbidhataṃ upādāya ‘‘cattāro’’ti ca vattabbatāya sati vijjamānattā. Vacanānusandhinā ‘‘ekāyano aya’’ntiādikā desanā sānusandhikāva, na ananusandhikāti adhippāyo. Vuttamevatthaṃ nidassanena paṭipādetuṃ ‘‘mārasenappamaddana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.224) suttapadaṃ ānetvā ‘‘yathā’’tiādinā nidassanaṃ saṃsandati. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādi nigamanaṃ.
特别地,身与受是生起乐味的原因,为了断除它们,对于作为渴爱依处的粗、细所缘,开显不净与苦的样态,这对钝根与利根的渴爱行者来说容易做到,因此这些被称为他们的‘清净道’。同样,由于执取‘常、我’的倾向,对于作为见之特殊原因的心与诸法,开显无常、无我的样态,依于有贪等、依于想触等、依于盖等,针对那些并非过于微细或过于微细的情形,为了断除它们,这对钝根与利根的见行者来说容易做到,因此对他们而言,这些称为‘清净道’。在此,虽然心与法也可能成为渴爱的依处,身与受也可能成为见的依处,但为了显示究竟何者对何者具有特别强的缘,所以作了特别提取,应当如此理解。利根的止乘者把握粗所缘后不滞留于彼,进入禅那,出定后再把握受,因此说‘因不于粗所缘停住’。而观乘者的心则倾向于微细的心与法,所以对于钝根和利根的观乘者来说,心随观与法随观即是‘清净道’,如此说。显示巴利原文
Visesato kāyo, vedanā ca assādassa kāraṇanti tappahānatthaṃ tesu taṇhāvatthūsu oḷārikasukhumesu asubhadukkhabhāvadassanāni mandatikkhapaññehi taṇhācaritehi sukarānīti tāni tesaṃ ‘‘visuddhimaggo’’ti vuttāni. Tathā ‘‘niccaṃ attā’’ti abhinivesavatthutāya diṭṭhiyā visesakāraṇesu cittadhammesu aniccānattatādassanāni sarāgādivasena, saññāphassādivasena, nīvaraṇādivasena ca nātippabhedātippabhedagatesu tesu tappahānatthaṃ mandatikkhapaññānaṃ diṭṭhicaritānaṃ sukarānīti tesaṃ tāni ‘‘visuddhimaggo’’ti vuttāni. Ettha ca yathā cittadhammānampi taṇhāya vatthubhāvo sambhavati, tathā kāyavedanānampi diṭṭhiyāti satipi nesaṃ catunnampi taṇhādiṭṭhivatthubhāve yo yassā sātisayapaccayo, taṃ dassanatthaṃ visesaggahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tikkhapaññasamathayāniko oḷārikārammaṇaṃ pariggaṇhanto tattha aṭṭhatvā jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā uṭṭhāya vedanaṃ pariggaṇhātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘oḷārikārammaṇe asaṇṭhahanato’’ti. Vipassanāyānikassa pana sukhume citte, dhammesu ca cittaṃ pakkhandatīti cittadhammānupassanānaṃ mandatikkhapaññavipassanāyānikānaṃ visuddhimaggatā vuttā.
在‘对于他们,在那里’一句中,‘在那里’一词应与‘为了断除’相连。后面‘对于他们,在那里’也是同样的理解方式。五种欲妙特别在身中获得,所以身是欲流的特别依处;于诸有中,由于以执取乐的方式而对有生起乐味,所以受是有流的依处;由于执取相续与密集,特别在心中产生我执,所以心是见流的依处;在诸法中,由于难以区分辨析,以及诸法仅是法本身而难以通达,因此产生迷惑,所以诸法是无明流的依处。因此,为了断除他们各自相应的那四种流,仅说这四种。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ tatthāti ettha tattha-saddassa ‘‘pahānattha’’nti etena yojanā. Parato tesaṃ tatthāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pañca kāmaguṇā savisesā kāye labbhantīti visesena kāyo kāmoghassa vatthu, bhavesu sukhaggahaṇavasena bhavassādo hotīti bhavoghassa vedanā vatthu, santatighanaggahaṇavasena visesato citte attābhiniveso hotīti diṭṭhoghassa cittaṃ vatthu, dhammesu vinibbhogassa dukkarattā, dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya duppaṭivijjhattā ca sammoho hotīti avijjoghassa dhammā vatthu, tasmā tesu tesaṃ pahānatthaṃ cattārova vuttā.
如此,通过说明身等是欲流等的依处,也就揭示了它们也是欲轭、欲漏等的依处,因为那些轭、漏与这些流在意义上无别。既然身是欲流等的依处,因此它也是‘贪欲身结缚’的依处。‘对于苦受,嗔随眠随眠’——作为苦苦、变易苦、行苦的受,特别地成为‘嗔恚身结缚’的依处。由于在心中以执取常的方式,执取‘由自戒得清净’等,所以‘戒禁取’的依处是心。对于那些不能如实照见名色的分别,而执取‘此是真实’的有见、无见者,诸法便是这些见的依处。身作为‘欲取’的依处,如前所述即可成立,因为身是欲流的依处,所以也是欲取的依处,这在意义上没有区别。由于执著乐受的乐味而漠视他世,生起‘无有布施’等的执取,所以受是‘见取’的依处。心与法是其余二取的依处,一如在第三与第四结缚的关联中所说。身与受是‘欲行’、‘瞋行’的依处,也同样在欲流、嗔恚身结缚的关联中已说。由于执取相续与密集,对于有贪等的心产生迷惑,所以心是‘痴行’的依处。由于不能觉了法的自性而产生怖畏,所以法是‘怖畏行’的依处。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kāyādīnaṃ kāmoghādivatthubhāvakathaneneva kāmayogakāmāsavādīnampi vatthubhāvo dīpito hoti oghehi tesaṃ atthato anaññattā. Yadaggena ca kāyo kāmoghādīnaṃ vatthu, tadaggena abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu. ‘‘Dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā visesena byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu. Citte niccaggahaṇavasena sassatassa attano sīlena suddhīti ādi parāmasanaṃ hotīti sīlabbataparāmāsassa cittaṃ vatthu. Nāmarūpaparicchedena bhūtaṃ bhūtato apassantassa bhavavibhavadiṭṭhisaṅkhāto idaṃsaccābhiniveso hotīti tassa dhammā vatthu. Kāyassa kāmupādānavatthutā vuttanayāva. Yadaggena hi kāyo kāmoghassa vatthu, tadaggena kāmupādānassapi vatthu atthato abhinnattā. Sukhavedanassādavasena paralokanirapekkho ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikaṃ (dī. ni. 1.171; ma. ni. 1.445; 2.95, 225; 3.91, 116; saṃ. ni. 3.210; dha. sa. 1221; vibha. 938) parāmāsaṃ uppādetīti diṭṭhupādānassa vedanā vatthu . Cittadhammānaṃ itarupādānavatthutā tatiyacatutthaganthayojanāyaṃ vuttanayā eva. Kāyavedanānaṃ chandadosāgativatthutā kāmoghabyāpādakāyaganthayojanāyaṃ vuttanayā eva. Santatighanaggahaṇavasena sarāgādicitte sammoho hotīti mohāgatiyā cittaṃ vatthu. Dhammasabhāvānavabodhe bhayaṃ hotīti bhayāgatiyā dhammā vatthu.
依据经文:“由食集起而有身集,由触集起而有受集,由行缘识,由识缘名色”,因此,成为身等集起之因的段食、触食、意思食、识食这四种食,通过对身等的遍知而被遍知,故说“为了遍知四种食”。这便是《指导论》的理趣,即依《指导论》来注释经典的理趣。显示巴利原文
Āhārasamudayā kāyassa samudayā, phassasamudayā vedanānaṃ samudayo, (saṃ. ni. 5.408) saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpanti (ma. ni. 3.126; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato kāyādīnaṃ samudayabhūtā kabaḷīkāraphassamanosañcetanāviññāṇāhārā kāyādiparijānanena pariññātā hontīti āha ‘‘catubbidhāhārapariññattha’’nti. Pakaraṇanayoti nettipakaraṇavasena suttantasaṃvaṇṇanānayo.
“通过随念的方式”:即通过忆持身等及善等诸法。他们藉此忆持而到达涅槃,因此称为“念”。在此义中,于唯一、单一自性的涅槃中归入、会合,即是“单一归入”。为显明此义,故说“正如……”等。显示巴利原文
Saraṇavasenāti kāyādīnaṃ, kusalādidhammānañca upadhāraṇavasena. Saranti gacchanti nibbānaṃ etāyāti satīti imasmiṃ atthe ekatte ekasabhāve nibbāne samosaraṇaṃ samāgamo ekattasamosaraṇaṃ. Etadeva hi dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
或者,成为进入同一涅槃之因的、由于共同性而成为一的念处的自性,就是「单一」;在这当中的归入,就是「单一归入」。这仅仅是相同部分而已。但是,为了显示成为进入同一涅槃之因,才说“正如……”等。在这个意义中,随念、单一、归入这三者与念处的单一性一起被说为因,应当明了;而在前一个意义中,它们是各别的。或者,“通过随念的方式”即通过前往的方式,那前往本身就是归入;或者,在不依念的词义而说归入时,忆持本身即是念,因为没有其他念的词义。这样,前者是念之存在的因,后者是单一之存在的因,因此即使在涅槃的归入中,这三者也同样被说为念处单一性的因。显示巴利原文
Ekanibbānapavesahetubhūto vā samānatāya eko satipaṭṭhānasabhāvo ekattaṃ, tattha samosaraṇaṃ ekattasamosaraṇaṃ, taṃsabhāgatāva, ekanibbānapavesahetubhāvaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādimāha. Etasmiṃ atthe saraṇekattasamosaraṇāni saheva satipaṭṭhānekabhāvassa kāraṇattena vuttānīti daṭṭhabbāni, purimasmiṃ visuṃ. Saraṇavasenāti vā gamanavasenāti atthe sati tadeva gamanaṃ samosaraṇanti, samosaraṇe vā sati-saddatthavasena avuccamāne dhāraṇatāva satīti sati-saddatthantarābhāvā purimaṃ satibhāvassa kāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ ekabhāvassāti nibbānasamosaraṇepi sahitāneva tāni satipaṭṭhānekabhāvassa kāraṇāni vuttāni honti.
这是依据经文中入出息节等分类而说的。然而,由于它们之间内在的差别及随之而来的差别,在修习中确实能获得多种方式。应当理解为,如四方所生起的财物种类相似,这是对于身随观等各个念处修习威力的譬喻。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cuddasavidhena, navavidhena, soḷasavidhena, pañcavidhenā’’ti idaṃ upari pāḷiyaṃ (dī. ni. 2.374) āgatānaṃ ānāpānapabbādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, tesaṃ pana anantarabhedavasena, tadanugatabhedavasena ca bhāvanāya anekavidhatā labbhatiyeva, catūsu disāsu uṭṭhānakabhaṇḍasadisatā kāyānupassanāditaṃtaṃsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanānubhāvassa daṭṭhabbā.
因为这里不存在其他提问的可能,这仅是由于想要解说而发问,也由于想要以说明等方式教导而这样说。“这里”指出那位修行成就的比丘的所依,而他的所依除了教法之外别无其他,因此说“这里,即在此教法中”。而“法……”等说法,是为了让他们现前面对自己,及为恭敬听法。因为“诸比丘,应行于自己父亲、祖父的领域”等教导,比丘的行境就是这些法,即身随观等。在那里,由于通过身随观等的行道而成为比丘,所以用“安住于身随观”等来显示比丘,因为对于比丘那是决定性的,因此说“由于以行道显示比丘身份”。由于他随顺大师的行仪,并接受全部教法,所以对于一切种类的教诫都堪为受持之器。当他被把握时,即把握了比丘僧团中最上首者,如同国王行进时,其余随从也同样在意义上被把握,所以说“其余……”等。如此,先解释一个理由,再解释其余理由,而说“而凡此人……”等。显示巴利原文
Kathetukamyatāpucchā itarāsaṃ pucchānaṃ idha asambhavato, niddesādivasena desetukamyatāya ca tathā vuttattā. ‘‘Idhā’’ti vuccamānapaṭipattisampādakassa bhikkhuno sannissayadassanaṃ, so cassa sannissayo sāsanato añño natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane’’ti. Dhamma…pe… lapanametaṃ tesaṃ attano sammukhābhimukhabhāvakaraṇatthaṃ, tañca dhammassa sakkaccasavanatthaṃ. ‘‘Gocare bhikkhave caratha sake pettike visaye’’tiādi (dī. ni. 3.80; saṃ. ni. 5.372) vacanato bhikkhugocarā ete dhammā, yadidaṃ kāyānupassanādayo. Tattha yasmā kāyānupassanādipaṭipattiyā bhikkhu hoti, tasmā ‘‘kāyānupassī viharatī’’tiādinā bhikkhuṃ dasseti bhikkhumhi taṃniyamatoti āha ‘‘paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanato’’ti. Satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā, sakalasāsanasampaṭiggāhakattā ca sabbappakārāya anusāsaniyā bhājanabhāvo. Tasmiṃ gahiteti bhikkhumhi gahite. Bhikkhuparisāya jeṭṭhabhāvato rājagamanañāyena itarā parisāpi atthato gahitāva hontīti āha ‘‘sesā’’tiādi. Evaṃ paṭhamaṃ kāraṇaṃ vibhajitvā itarampi vibhajituṃ ‘‘yo ca ima’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
「平等而行」:指舍弃身体等的不平等行,以身体等平等而行。由于贪等止息,称为「寂静」;由于调伏诸根,称为「调御」;由于四道的决定,称为「决定」;凭藉最上的行持,称为「梵行」;于一切处放下身杖等,所以是「收起了杖」。安住于圣者状态的他,已除弃恶、止息恶、断除烦恼,应当知道他就是‘婆罗门、沙门、比丘’。显示巴利原文
Samaṃ careyyāti kāyādi visamacariyaṃ pahāya kāyādīhi samaṃ careyya. Rāgādivūpasamena santo, indriyadamena danto, catumagganiyāmena niyato, seṭṭhacaritāya brahmacārī, sabbattha kāyadaṇḍādioropanena nidhāya daṇḍaṃ. Ariyabhāve ṭhito so evarūpo bāhitapāpasamitapāpabhinnakilesatāhi ‘‘brāhmaṇo, samaṇo, bhikkhū’’ti ca veditabbo.
于「此身及外名色」等经文中,是指五蕴;同样,于「以身感受乐」(《中部》1.271, 287;《波罗夷》11)等经文中,以及在「那时,身的轻安、止息」等经文中,受等心所法所属的诸蕴被称为「身」。因此,为了加以简别,而说「身,即指色身」。而「发等诸法」,是指被称为发等的、由诸界与所造色所构成的诸法。如此,依「集聚义、身体义、身之义」的语法规则显示了「身」这个词之后,现在为了再从词源上加以说明,而说「如同……」等。「来」(āyanti)意思是生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayañceva kāyo, bahiddhā ca nāmarūpa’’ntiādīsu khandhapañcakaṃ, tathā ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.271, 287; pārā. 11), ‘‘yā tasmiṃ samaye kāyassa passaddhi paṭippassaddhī’’tiādīsu ca vedanādayo cetasikā khandhā kāyoti vuccantīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘kāyeti rūpakāye’’ti āha. Kesādīnañca dhammānanti kesādisaññitānaṃ bhūtupādādhammānaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘cayaṭṭho sarīraṭṭho kāyaṭṭho’’ti saddanayena kāya-saddaṃ dassetvā idāni niruttinayenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āyantīti uppajjanti.
「不混杂」的意思是:受等心所也依止于此、系著于此,因此,即便出现了以身作为所缘而修习受等随观的情形,也不视为与它们相混杂。由于「身」这个词具有集合的范畴,而不净相是依于聚集而执取的,所以使用单数的「于身」;同样,心虽然因所缘等差别而有多种分类,但依心识状态的共通性统括为一,故用单数的「于心」;然而,受因为有乐等差别而分为多种,应各别地加以随观,因此以复数宣说为「于诸受」,论中也是如此阐述;诸法有五十多种类别,且随观的方式也多种多样,故同样以复数宣说。显示巴利原文
Asammissatoti vedanādayopi ettha sitā, ettha paṭibaddhāti kāye vedanādianupassanāpasaṅgepi āpanne tato asammissatoti attho. Samūhavisayatāya cassa kāya-saddassa, samudāyupādānatāya ca asubhākārassa ‘‘kāye’’ti ekavacanaṃ, tathā ārammaṇādivibhāgena anekabhedabhinnampi cittaṃ cittabhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘citte’’ti ekavacanaṃ, vedanā pana sukhādibhedabhinnā visuṃ visuṃ anupassitabbāti dassentena ‘‘vedanāsū’’ti bahuvacanena vuttā, tatheva ca niddeso pavattito, dhammā ca paropaṇṇāsabhedā, anupassitabbākārena ca anekabhedā evāti tepi bahuvacanavaseneva vuttā.
为了遮止对有分的执取、对通俗名称的随逐、对核心的执取以及执著,便将身从诸支节中剥离,将诸支节从发等中剥离,再将发等从诸界与所造色中剥离,因此说「如是于身无……」等。正如对于殿堂等城市组成部分的集合,主张有整体实体的人也不会生起「城市是整体」的执取;然而有些人却可能随通俗名称而认为:「确实有一种叫做『城市』的东西存在」,因此举出城市的譬喻,来说明对「女人、男人」等通俗名称的随逐。支节的集合、发毛等的集合、诸界与所造色的集合,就是所说的集合。离开这些,根本不存在所谓的「身」,更何况「女人」等,所以宣说:「不见有任何法,如身、女人、男人或其他任何法。」以「任何法」遮止了有情、命者等,而「有分」则通过遮止身而得以遮止。既然如此,为什么还会有随通俗名称而对身等的追逐呢?答:「如所说的诸法……作……。」所谓「如是如是」,就是以身体等形式(来指称)。显示巴利原文
Avayavīgāhasamaññātidhāvanasārādānābhinivesanisedhanatthaṃ kāyaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgehi, tāni ca kesādīhi, kesādike ca bhūtupādāyarūpehi vinibbhuñjanto ‘‘tathā na kāye’’tiādimāha. Pāsādādinagarāvayavasamūhe avayavīvādinopi avayavīgāhaṃ na karonti, ‘‘nagaraṃ nāma koci attho atthī’’ti pana kesañci samaññātidhāvanaṃ siyāti itthipurisādisamaññātidhāvane nagaranidassanaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṅgapaccaṅgasamūho, kesalomādisamūho, bhūtupādāyasamūho ca yathāvuttasamūho, tabbinimutto kāyopi nāma koci natthi, pageva itthiādayoti āha ‘‘kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissatī’’ti. ‘‘Koci dhammo’’ti iminā sattajīvādiṃ paṭikkhipati, avayavī pana kāyapaṭikkhepeneva paṭikkhittoti. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ kāyādisamaññātidhāvanānīti āha ‘‘yathāvuttadhamma…pe… karontī’’ti. Tathā tathāti kāyādiākārena.
“如果看见”(yaṃ passati):指见到女人或男人。难道不是并没有以眼看见女人、男人吗?的确如此,然而依于“我看见女人,我看见男人”这种想而生起,故说为“看见”;或者,以邪见而见者,其所见并非那色处,因为是依颠倒执取和错误想象而形成的。或者,所谓发等、诸界及所造色的集合,并非所见,因非眼识所能了别,故非所见。“所见,彼不见”:意为,那色处——发等、诸界与所造色的集合——是所见,但若以慧眼如实照见,则并不见。“不见而被缚”:意为,不能以慧眼如实照见此有身的人,便被烦恼的系缚——“这是我的,这就是我,这是我的自我”——所捆绑。显示巴利原文
Yaṃpassatīti yaṃ itthiṃ, purisaṃ vā passati. Nanu cakkhunā itthipurisadassanaṃ natthīti? Saccametaṃ, ‘‘itthiṃ passāmi, purisaṃ passāmī’’ti pana pavattasaññāya vasena ‘‘yaṃ passatī’’ti vuttaṃ micchādassanena vā diṭṭhiyā yaṃ passati, na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ rūpāyatanaṃ na hotīti attho viparītaggāhavasena micchāparikappitarūpattā. Atha vā taṃ kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ na hoti, acakkhuviññāṇaviññeyyattā diṭṭhaṃ vā taṃ na hoti. Yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ na passatīti yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ paññācakkhunā bhūtato na passatīti attho. Apassaṃ bajjhateti imaṃ attabhāvaṃ yathābhūtaṃ paññācakkhunā apassanto ‘‘etaṃ mama, eso hamasmi, eso me attā’’ti kilesabandhanena bajjhati.
“非其他法随观”:意为不随观其他自性,即不从“不净”等其他行相而随观,这就是它的含义。接着以“说了什么呢?”等语来阐明此义。“地界”:指发等部分,因为它是诸法的集合,故称为“身”;或者,指具有多种类别、遍满全身、前后相续而存在的特相地,以集合的方式来把握,故称为“身”。“水界”等也应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Na aññadhammānupassīti na aññasabhāvānupassī, asubhādito aññākārānupassī na hotīti attho. ‘‘Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādinā taṃ evatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti. Pathavīkāyanti kesādikoṭṭhāsaṃ pathaviṃ dhammasamūhattā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati, lakkhaṇapathavimeva vā anekappabhedaṃ sakalasarīragataṃ, pubbāpariyabhāvena ca pavattamānaṃ samūhavasena gahetvā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati. ‘‘Āpokāya’’ntiādīsupi eseva nayo.
“于如是应执取者”:即愚昧者以“我、我所”的自体性与属我性所执取的对象。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gahetabbassāti ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti evaṃ attattaniyabhāvena andhabālehi gahetabbassa.
现在,为了再从七种随观的角度来显示身随观,而开始宣说“再者……”等。其中,“随观为无常”:即对由四种原因所生之身,随观为“无常”。这样观照的人,也就是在随观无常相,所以称为“随观”。对他而言,连丝毫的常恒之执都不会有,故说“非常”。因为经中说:“他断除常想”(《无碍解道》3.35)。在这里,“即随观为无常”中的“即”字是省略而隐含的,因此为了显示它所否定的意思,才说“非常”。不应认为此处也否定了苦随观等,因为“即”字的作用只是遮止其对立面,而且这些(其他随观)在稍后会宣说。在“随观为苦”等处,道理也是一样。所不同的是:无常故是苦,因此他对那同一个身随观为苦;因为是苦所以是无我,因此又随观为无我。又由于凡是无常、苦、无我的事物,便不应欣喜,凡是不应欣喜的,便不应染着,所以宣说“厌离,非欣喜;离染,非染着”。他这样不染着,便能让贪灭尽而不令其生起,也就是不令贪爱集起的意思。这样修行的人,便能“弃舍,不执取”。因为这种无常等随观,通过彼分断的方式,连同身体及依于身体的蕴和诸行,舍弃烦恼。显示巴利原文
Idāni sattannaṃ anupassanākārānampi vasena kāyānupassanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha aniccato anupassatīti catusamuṭṭhānikaṃ kāyaṃ ‘‘anicca’’nti anupassati, evaṃ passanto evañcassa aniccākārampi ‘‘anupassatī’’ti vuccati. Tathābhūtassa cassa niccaggāhassa lesopi na hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘no niccato’’ti. Tathā hesa ‘‘niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) vutto. Ettha ca ‘‘aniccato eva anupassatī’’ti eva-kāro luttaniddiṭṭhoti tena nivattitamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no niccato’’ti vuttaṃ. Na cettha dukkhato anupassanādinivattanaṃ āsaṅkitabbaṃ paṭiyogīnivattanaparattā eva-kārassa, upari desanāruḷhattā ca tāsaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhato anupassatī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – aniccassa dukkhattā tameva ca kāyaṃ dukkhato anupassati, dukkhassa anattattā anattato anupassati. Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, na taṃ abhinanditabbaṃ, yañca na abhinanditabbaṃ, na tattha rañjitabbaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbindati, no nandati. Virajjati, no rajjatī’’ti. So evaṃ arajjanto rāgaṃ nirodheti, no samudeti samudayaṃ na karotīti attho. Evaṃ paṭipanno ca paṭinissajjati, no ādiyati. Ayañhi aniccādianupassanā tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ kāyaṃ tannissayakhandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato, saṅkhatadosadassanena tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato ‘‘pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cā’’ti vuccati, tasmā tāya samannāgato bhikkhu vuttanayena kilese pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati, tathābhūto ca nibbattanavasena kilese na ādiyati, nāpi adosadassitāvasena saṅkhatārammaṇaṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭinissajjati, no ādiyatī’’ti. Idānissa tāhi anupassanāhi yesaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha niccasaññanti ‘‘saṅkhārā niccā’’ti evaṃ pavattaṃ viparītasaññaṃ. Diṭṭhicittavipallāsappahānamukheneva saññāvipallāsappahānanti saññāggahaṇaṃ, saññāsīsena vā tesampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nandinti sappītikataṇhaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
“安住”:这个词表示具足身随观的比丘的威仪住,所以称为“行止”,意思是转起威仪。由于能作为所缘而遍满,所以说“于三有”;但从生起的方式而言,烦恼只是部分界域的。虽然“热勤”的意思是指以正见等断除烦恼,但如同“勤”字一样,“热勤”一词通常只用于精进,因此说“这是精进的名称”。或者,在对治品的断除中,精进与相应法一起策励而转起,这种殊胜的状态被称为“热勤”,而不是指其他法。而“具热勤者”中的这个“具”字是表示赞叹或殊胜,所以用“具热勤者”这个称呼来显示成就了正勤。“正知”:正确、全面、自在地了知即是“正知”。因其安立不混杂、没有其他法随观的状态,故是正确、无颠倒;以一切行相了知,故是全面;以不断引生上上殊胜的状态而自在了知,这就是它的意思。但如果用慧来随观,怎么是念处呢?因此说“不……”等。“一切处有用”:即存在于一切处,在昏沉心或掉举心时都应希求;或者,一切应修习的觉支都存在于其中,所以称为一切处有用。正是凭借得到资助的慧,在此所说的身体上,修习业处的比丘才能“身随观而住”。“内缩”:显示巴利原文
‘‘Viharatī’’ti iminā kāyānupassanāsamaṅgino iriyāpathavihāro vuttoti āha ‘‘iriyatī’’ti, iriyāpathaṃ pavattetīti attho. Ārammaṇakaraṇavasena abhibyāpanato ‘‘tīsu bhavesū’’ti vuttaṃ, uppajjanavasena pana kilesā parittabhūmakā evāti. Yadipi kilesānaṃ pahānaṃ ātāpananti taṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnampi attheva, ātappa-saddo viya pana ātāpasaddo vīriyeyeva niruḷhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyassetaṃ nāma’’nti. Atha vā paṭipakkhappahāne sampayuttadhammānaṃ abbhussahanavasena pavattamānassa vīriyassa sātisayaṃ tadātāpananti vīriyameva tathā vuccati, na aññe dhammā. Ātāpīti cāyamīkāro pasaṃsāya, atisayassa vā dīpakoti ātāpīgahaṇena sammappadhānasamaṅgitaṃ dasseti. Sammā, samantato, sāmañca pajānanto sampajāno, asammissato vavatthāne aññadhammānupassitābhāvena sammā aviparītaṃ, sabbākārapajānanena samantato, uparūpari visesāvahabhāvena pavattiyā sāmaṃ pajānantoti attho . Yadi paññāya anupassati, kathaṃ satipaṭṭhānatāti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Sabbatthikanti sabbattha bhavaṃ sabbattha līne, uddhate ca citte icchitabbattā. Sabbe vā līne, uddhate ca bhāvetabbā bojjhaṅgā atthikā etāyāti sabbatthikā. Satiyā laddhupakārāya eva paññāya ettha yathāvutte kāye kammaṭṭhāniko bhikkhu kāyānupassī viharati. Anto saṅkhepo antoolīyano, kosajjanti attho. Upāyapariggaheti ettha sīlavisodhanādi, gaṇanādi, uggahakosallādi ca upāyo, tabbipariyāyato anupāyo veditabbo. Yasmā ca upaṭṭhitassati yathāvuttaṃ upāyaṃ na pariccajati, anupāyañca na upādiyati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘muṭṭhassatī…pe… asamattho hotī’’ti. Tenāti upāyānupāyānaṃ pariggahaparivajjanesu, pariccāgāpariggahesu ca asamatthabhāvena. Assa yogino.
因为在这里,念本身即是念处,所以与它相应的精进等法就成为支,因此说「显示了它的相应支」。这里的「支」一词应视为原因的同义词。而且,仅仅由提到念,也应知道提到了定,因为念被包含在定蕴中。或者,因为此教法以念为首。单凭念不可能断除烦恼,也不可能证得涅槃,单凭念也不能转起,因此就像在禅那的教法中说到「有寻」等语一样,这里也是为了显示相应支,所以「支」一词应视为部分的同义词。「断支」:如同「离诸欲……」等经文中显示应断的支那样。因为这里指的是世间道,不是出世间道,所以为了显示前行分的调伏,而说「以彼分断或以镇伏断」。「那些诸法」:指受等诸法。因为在那个地方(此段)并不是所要指的,所以说「这是以举要方式而说的」。「彼处」:指在《分别》中。「此处」:指在「世间」一词中。显示巴利原文
Yasmā satiyevettha satipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmāssa sampayuttadhammā vīriyādayo aṅganti āha ‘‘sampayogaṅgañcassa dassetvā’’ti. Aṅga-saddo cettha kāraṇapariyāyo daṭṭhabbo. Satiggahaṇeneva cettha samādhissāpi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ tassā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitattā. Yasmā vā satisīsenāyaṃ desanā. Na hi kevalāya satiyā kilesappahānaṃ sambhavati, nibbānādhigamo vā, nāpi kevalā sati pavattati, tasmāssa jhānadesanāyaṃ savitakkādivacanassa viya sampayogaṅgadassanatāti aṅga-saddassa avayavapariyāyatā daṭṭhabbā. Pahānaṅganti ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.226; ma. ni. 1.271, 287, 297; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123; pārā. 11) viya pahātabbaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ. Yasmā ettha lokiyamaggo adhippeto, na lokuttaramaggo, tasmā pubbabhāgiyameva vinayaṃ dassento ‘‘tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā’’ti āha. Tesaṃ dhammānanti vedanādidhammānaṃ. Tesañhi tattha anadhippetattā ‘‘atthuddhāranayenetaṃ vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tatthāti vibhaṅge. Etthāti ‘‘loke’’ti etasmiṃ pade.
在总说以两者(贪与忧)无别断除诸盖之后,为显一一分别所说断除之差别,故云“特别地”。或为说明不说“调伏诸盖”而说“调伏贪忧”的用意,而说“特别地”等。因为,在身随观修习中,显示断除其直接对立的随喜与违逆等,正是此语用意之所在。“以身成就为根本者”,意指容色、体力、青春、健康等身体具足为相之人。依相反之理,当知以身衰败为根本的违逆。“以身修习”,即以身随观修习,于此被称作身修习。“净、乐、有我等等”——应知“等”字容摄了可意、常性等类。而在“不净、苦、无我等等”中,“等”字则容摄不可意、无常性等。“因此”,谓因已说断除随喜等。“由瑜伽威力”等,为阐明前说之义。“瑜伽威力”即修习威力。“瑜伽堪能者”,指有能力专修瑜伽者。因为,前面“离脱随喜与违逆”等文,明专修者之功德;其后文句,则明正专修者之行道。盖被随喜、违逆等所逼恼者,修习终不成就。显示巴利原文
Avisesena dvīhipi nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttanti katvā puna ekekena vuttaṃ pahānavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesenā’’ti āha. Atha vā ‘‘vineyya nīvaraṇānī’’ti avatvā abhijjhādomanassavinayavacanassa payojanaṃ dassento ‘‘visesenā’’tiādimāha. Kāyānupassanābhāvanāya hi ujuvipaccanīkānaṃ anurodhavirodhādīnaṃ pahānadassanaṃ etassa payojananti. Kāyasampattimūlakassāti rūpabalayobbanārogyādisarīrasampadānimittassa. Vuttavipariyāyato kāyavipattimūlako virodho veditabbo. Kāyabhāvanāyāti kāyānupassanābhāvanāya. Sā hi idha kāyabhāvanāti adhippetā. Subhasukhabhāvādīnanti ādi-saddena manuññaniccatādisaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Asubhāsukhabhāvādīnanti ettha pana ādi-saddena amanuññaaniccatādīnaṃ. Tenāti anurodhādippahānavacanena. ‘‘Yogānubhāvo hī’’tiādi vuttassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ. Yogānubhāvo hi bhāvanānubhāvo. Yogasamatthoti yogamanuyuñjituṃ samattho. Purimena hi ‘‘anurodhavirodhavippamutto’’tiādivacanena bhāvanaṃ anuyuttassa ānisaṃso vutto, dutiyena bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjantassa paṭipatti. Na hi anurodhavirodhādīhi upaddutassa bhāvanā ijjhati.
“随观者”于此——即“随观者”一词中所获得的随观,乃以显示随观而说明业处。当如是观其义,否则“以随观”之作具格表述便不合理。盖随观本身即是业处,此处非以所缘为意趣;或此亦合理。“说明了护身”为关联句。而于此,因成就了守护业处之义,故唯说“护身”。盖业处修行者之护身,正为守护业处。又或因守护业处以“具热忱者”等宣说,故唯说“护身”。又或“身”一词亦摄名身,非唯色身,故守护业处亦被容摄。如此,则“以住于此处所说之住而住”句中“此处”之说亦得成立,以“身随观者而住”之“住”乃特别宣说故。“具热忱者”等,则为将概略所说守护业处及其资具加以广说。“以热忱”——即以“热忱”一词。于“以念与正知”等例,理亦同然。“一切处业处”,指佛随念、慈、死随念、不净修习。以此四种业处为瑜伽行者所守护时,名为“一切处业处”;因其为一切处业处修习之守护位,且依念与正知之力恒常守护,所……显示巴利原文
Anupassītietthāti ‘‘anupassī’’ti etasmiṃ pade labbhamānāya anupassanāya anupassanājotanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo, aññathā ‘‘anupassanāyā’’ti karaṇavacanaṃ na yujjeyya. Anupassanā eva hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ, na ettha ārammaṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, yujjati vā. Kāyapariharaṇaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇassa cettha atthasiddhattā ‘‘kāyapariharaṇa’’ntveva vuttaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānikassa hi kāyapariharaṇaṃ yāvadeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariharaṇatthanti. Kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇassa vā ‘‘ātāpī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.373) vuccamānattā ‘‘kāyapariharaṇa’’ntveva vuttaṃ. Kāyaggahaṇena vā nāmakāyassāpi gahaṇaṃ, na rūpakāyasseva, teneva kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇampi saṅgahitaṃ hoti, evañca katvā ‘‘viharatīti ettha vuttavihārenā’’ti etthaggahaṇañca samatthitaṃ hoti ‘‘kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti vihārassa visesetvā vuttattā. ‘‘Ātāpī’’tiādi pana saṅkhepato vuttassa kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇassa saha sādhanena vitthāretvā dassanaṃ. Ātāpenāti ātāpaggahaṇena. ‘‘Satisampajaññenā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānanti buddhānussati, mettā, maraṇassati , asubhabhāvanā ca. Idañhi catukkaṃ yoginā parihariyamānaṃ ‘‘sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati, sabbattha kammaṭṭhānānuyogassārakkhabhūtattā satisampajaññabalena avicchinnassa pariharitabbattā satisampajaññaggahaṇena tassa vuttatā vuttā. Satiyā vā samatho vutto tassā samādhikkhandhena saṅgahitattā.
而在《分别论》(《分别论·身随观解说》)中,已说其义——此是关联。“与此……”意为不取字面之义,而与依开显真实义而转起的《分别论》文句一同。“注疏方法”即为了解说字面之义,亦随宜所说之义理解释方法。“如何相符”者,意即如何于意义上、意图上不相违,唯是一味地相符、一致,当如是了知。显示巴利原文
Vibhaṅge(vibha. kāyānupassanāniddese) pana attho vuttoti yojanā. Tenāti saddatthaṃ anādiyitvā bhāvatthasseva vibhajanavasena pavattena vibhaṅgapāṭhena saha. Aṭṭhakathānayoti saddatthassāpi vivaraṇavasena yathārahaṃ vutto atthasaṃvaṇṇanānayo. Yathā saṃsandatīti yathā atthato, adhippāyato ca avilomento aññadatthu saṃsandati sameti, evaṃ veditabbo.
其次,关于“再说受等”:在此,心与心所依止于受,随依止缘而存在;且在五蕴有中,非色法系属于色而转起。即使从受中可能摄入身等随观,但为了显示对受作不混杂的界定,并为了显示破除密集等,便再取“受”来说明。因此,并非在受中为身随观者,或心、法随观者,而唯独是“受随观者”。如此,在这名为受的事物上,仅依“受随观行相”的展现,即显示了不混杂的界定。同样地,“任何时候,当有乐受时,那时便无苦受或不苦不乐受;当有苦受、不苦不乐受时,那时便无其他受”:这并非在感受的共相上说,而是通过逐一剖析诸受,显示了破除密集与远离恒常的假相。由此,借由显示它们仅住一刹那,便彰显了无常性,从而也彰显了苦性及无我性。“破除密集等”——以“等”字也应了解此义。因为,这位修行者于受中是受随观者,而非其他法的随观者。其义为何?就像一个愚人,即使对并非宝石的水泡,也执取其相为宝石;而这位行者并非如此,即使在安住、可意的感受中尚且不执取,何况其他受。显示巴利原文
Vedanādīnaṃ puna vacaneti ettha nissayapaccayabhāvavasena cittadhammānaṃ vedanāsannissitattā, pañcavokārabhave arūpadhammānaṃ rūpapaṭibaddhavuttito ca vedanāya kāyādianupassanāppasaṅgepi āpanne tato asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassanatthaṃ, ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthañca dutiyaṃ vedanāggahaṇaṃ, tena na vedanāyaṃ kāyānupassī, cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho vedanānupassī evāti vedanāsaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ vedanānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye sukhā vedanā, na tasmiṃ samaye dukkhā, adukkhamasukhā vā vedanā, yasmiṃ vā pana samaye dukkhā, adukkhamasukhā vā vedanā, na tasmiṃ samaye itarā vedanā’’ti vedanābhāvasāmaññe avatvā taṃ taṃ vedanaṃ vinibbhujjitvā dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dhuvabhāvaviveko dassito hoti, tena tāsaṃ khaṇamattāvaṭṭhānadassanena aniccatāya , tato eva dukkhatāya, anattatāya ca dassanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hoti. Ghanavinibbhogādīti ādi-saddena ayampi attho veditabbo. Ayañhi vedanāyaṃ vedanānupassī eva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā nāma bālo amaṇisabhāvepi udakapubbuḷake maṇiākārānupassī hoti, na evaṃ ayaṃ ṭhitiramaṇīyepi vedayite, pageva itarasmiṃ manuññākārānupassī, atha kho khaṇapabhaṅguratāya, avasavattitāya kilesāsucipaggharaṇatāya ca aniccaanattaasubhākārānupassī, vipariṇāmadukkhatāya, saṅkhāradukkhatāya ca visesato dukkhānupassī yevāti. Evaṃ citta dhammesupi yathārahaṃ punavacane payojanaṃ vattabbaṃ. Lokiyā eva sammasanacārassa adhippetattā. ‘‘Kevalaṃ panidhā’’tiādinā ‘‘idha ettakaṃ veditabba’’nti veditabbaparicchedaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Esa nayo’’ti iminā yathā cittaṃ, dhammā ca anupassitabbā, tathā tāni anupassanto citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassīti veditabboti imamatthaṃ atidisati. Dukkhatoti dukkhasabhāvato, dukkhanti anupassitabbāti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
“谁人见乐为苦者”:即哪一位比丘,由变易之苦性,以慧眼见到乐受为“苦”。“见苦为箭者”:因能引生逼恼、从内刺穿、难以拔出,而观见苦受为箭。“不苦不乐”:指舍受。“寂静”:以其非如苦乐之粗重,且依缘而具寂静自性,故为寂静。“见为无常者”:因已生还灭、具生灭性、暂时性、与常相违,而见其为无常。“彼确为善见之比丘”:意指正确观见受的比丘,确定而明晰。显示巴利原文
Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato addāti yo bhikkhu sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhatāya ‘‘dukkhā’’ti paññācakkhunā addakkhi. Dukkhaṃ addakkhi sallatoti dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ pīḷājananato, antotudanato, dunnīharaṇato ca sallato addakkhi passi. Adukkhamasukhanti upekkhāvedanaṃ. Santanti sukhadukkhāni viya anoḷārikatāya, paccayavasena vūpasantasabhāvatāya ca santaṃ. Aniccatoti hutvāabhāvato, udayavayavantato, tāvakālikato, niccapaṭipakkhato ca ‘‘anicca’’nti yo addakkhi. Sa ve sammaddasobhikkhu ekaṃsena, paribyattaṃ vā vedanāya sammāpassanakoti attho.
“也为苦故”:因行苦性,故亦是苦。“那在苦中”:我说所有一切受,皆包含、归属于苦,以不能超越行苦性故。“且从乐与苦”:对于乐等,由住立、变异及了知,说为乐性;由变异、住立及不了知,说为苦性,因此三种受皆当从乐随观,也皆当从苦随观。此即其义。七种随观下文当说。“其余”:即从上述乐等分类之余,如受随观中应说的有染、无染等分类。显示巴利原文
Dukkhātipīti saṅkhāradukkhatāya dukkhā itipi. Taṃ dukkhasminti sabbaṃ taṃ vedayitaṃ dukkhasmiṃ antogadhaṃ pariyāpannaṃ vadāmi saṅkhāradukkhatānativattanato. Sukhadukkhatopi cāti sukhādīnaṃ ṭhitivipariṇāmañāṇasukhatāya, vipariṇāmaṭhitiaññāṇadukkhatāya ca vuttattā tissopi ca sukhato, tissopi ca dukkhato anupassitabbāti attho. Satta anupassanā heṭṭhā pakāsitā eva. Sesanti yathāvuttaṃ sukhādivibhāgato sesaṃ sāmisanirāmisādibhedaṃ vedanānupassanāyaṃ vattabbaṃ.
「所缘……等的差别」:即依色等所缘的种种性,及青等种种差别;依欲等增上的种种性,及劣等种种差别;依智、禅那等俱生法的种种性,及有行、无行、有寻等种种差别;依欲界等地之种种性,及殊胜、中等种种差别;依善等业之种种性,及令趣向天趣等种种差别;依黑白异熟之种种性,及现法受等种种差别;依小地等唯作之种种性,及三因等种种差别——如此而作随观。这是关联的说明。其中“等”字,应知还涵盖了依有基、无基等种种性,以及三人共通等种种差别的归类。
「自相与共相」:即依触等各自之相,以及依无常性等共相而作随观。这是关联的说明。
「空性法」:即具有名为无我性的空性自性之法。为阐明此空性,在阿毗达摩中,以“那时,确实有诸法,有诸蕴”等(《法集论》121)开示了空性门。此空性于先前即已被断除,既已先断,便不应再一一说明其断除。为什么?因为烦恼在被断除时,并非依所缘之区分而断,只是要断除未来当生的烦恼。因此,于一处说了贪忧的断除之后,不必在别处再重复说。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇa…pe… bhedānanti rūpādiārammaṇanānattassa nīlāditabbhedassa, chandādiadhipatinānattassa hīnāditabbhedassa, ñāṇajhānādisahajātanānattassa sasaṅkhārikāsaṅkhārikasavitakkāditabbhedassa, kāmāvacarādibhūminānattassa ukkaṭṭhamajjhimāditabbhedassa, kusalādikammanānattassa devagatisaṃvattaniyatāditabbhedassa, kaṇhasukkavipākanānattassa diṭṭhadhammavedanīyatāditabbhedassa, parittabhūmakādikiriyānānattassa tihetukāditabbhedassa vasena anupassitabbanti yojanā. Ādi-saddena savatthukāvatthukādinānattassa puggalattayasādhāraṇāditabbhedassa ca saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānanti phusanāditaṃtaṃlakkhaṇānañceva aniccatādisāmaññalakkhaṇānañca vasenāti yojanā. Suññatadhammassāti anattatāsaṅkhātasuññatāsabhāvassa. Yaṃ vibhāvetuṃ abhidhamme‘‘tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā honti, khandhā hontī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 121) suññatāvāradesanā pavattā, taṃ pahīnameva pubbe pahīnattā, tasmā tassa tassa puna pahānaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Na hi kilesā pahīyamānā ārammaṇavibhāgena pahīyanti anāgatānaṃyeva uppajjanārahānaṃ pahātabbattā, tasmā abhijjhādīnaṃ ekattha pahānaṃ vatvā itarattha na vattabbaṃ evāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘kāmañcetthā’’tiādinā. Atha vā maggacittakkhaṇe ekattha pahīnaṃ sabbattha pahīnameva hotīti visuṃ visuṃ pahānaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Maggena hi pahīnāti vattabbataṃ arahanti. Tattha purimāya codanāya nānāpuggalaparihāro, na hi ekassa pahīnaṃ tato aññassa pahīnaṃ nāma hoti. Pacchimāya nānācittakkhaṇikaparihāro. Nānācittakkhaṇeti hi lokiyamaggacittakkhaṇeti adhippāyo. Pubbabhāgamaggo hi idhādhippeto. Lokiyabhāvanāya ca kāye pahīnaṃ na vedanādīsu vikkhambhitaṃ hoti. Yadipi nappavatteyya, paṭipakkhabhāvanāya suppahīnattā tattha sā ‘‘abhijjhādomanassassa appavattī’’ti na vattabbā, tasmā punapi tappahānaṃ vattabbameva. Ekattha pahīnaṃ sesesupi pahīnaṃ hotīti lokuttarasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ, lokiyabhāvanāya vā sabbattha appavattimattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcapi khandhā upādānakkhandhā loko’’ti (vibha. 362, 364, 366) hi vibhaṅgecatūsupi ṭhānesu vuttanti.
入出息节的注释显示巴利原文
Ānāpānapabbavaṇṇanā
374 「以所缘为依」:即以应被随观的身等所缘为依。「分为四种」:即依总说而分为四种。从那四种念住中,各取一种念住而分析“身”——此为省略之言。显示巴利原文
374.Ārammaṇavasenāti anupassitabbakāyādiārammaṇavasena. Catudhā bhinditvāti uddesavasena catudhā bhinditvā. Tato catubbidhasatipaṭṭhānato ekekaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā kāyaṃ vibhajantoti pāṭhaseso.
「怎样呢?」:此处「怎样」是询问方式,藉此询问所阐明的身随观之方式。「而」字表示区别,藉此显示在总说门中隐而不显、于详说门中方得开显的差别。由于其中一部分方式在外道中也可能出现,因此总摄一切方式,称为「一切方式的身随观成就者」。由此,凡是依出入息分等所说的十四种方式,以及其中包含的内等随观方式,还有《身至念经》中依发等的色、形、遍所缘而说的四种禅那方式,以及世间等种种方式,这一切皆毫无遗漏地含摄在内。又因有言:「这些方式唯此教法中有,不从此教之外而有」,故经文说「一切方式……遮止者」。其中,「遮止彼状态」是指:遮止那一切方式身随观成就的补特伽罗,以其他教说为依止的状态。以此显示,此处「诸比丘」中的「此处」一词,含有「唯」字的意义。因为即使是单个的词,也可表达决定义,如「食风者」之例。因此经文说:「唯此处,比丘们,有沙门」等。何以故?因为那位成就一切方式身随观的人,才是具足沙门性法的人。「外道论」:即其他外道的种种言论与宗派依处。显示巴利原文
Kathañcāti ettha kathanti pakārapucchā, tena niddisiyamāne kāyānupassanāpakāre pucchati. Ca-saddo byatireko, tena uddesavārena apākaṭaṃ niddesavārena vibhāviyamānaṃ visesaṃ joteti. Bāhirakesupi ito ekadesassa sambhavato sabbappakāraggahaṇaṃ kataṃ ‘‘sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassā’’ti, tena ye ime ānāpānapabbādivasena āgatā cuddasappakārā, tadantogadhā ca ajjhattādianupassanāppakārā, tathā kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153) vuttā kesādivaṇṇasaṇṭhānakasiṇārammaṇacatukkajjhānappakārā, lokiyādippakārā ca, te sabbepi anavasesato saṅgaṇhāti. Ime ca pakārā imasmiṃyeva sāsane, na ito bahiddhāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbappakāra…pe… paṭisedhano cā’’ti. Tattha tathābhāvapaṭisedhanoti sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassa puggalassa aññasāsanassa nissayabhāvapaṭisedhano, etena idha bhikkhaveti ettha idha-saddo antogadhaevasaddatthoti dasseti. Santi hi ekapadānipi avadhāraṇāni yathā ‘‘vāyubhakkho’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘idheva bhikkhavesamaṇo’’tiādi. Paripuṇṇasamaṇappakaraṇadhammo hi so puggalo, yo sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattako. Parappavādāti paresaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ nānappakārā vādā titthāyatanāni.
为了显示唯有阿兰若等才是适合修习的住处,故说「对此」等。难以调伏、不能接受调伏的牛,称为「暴恶牛」。在挤乳时,犹如乳房不能毫无保留地流出乳汁,能障碍挤乳者,名为「暴恶母牛」。「缘色、声等而生起的味著」:即对于色等所缘所生的味著。「宿习所缘」的意思是:出家以前,或在无始轮回中已熟悉、串习的所缘。「将会系缚」:即会系缚。「以念」:即依正确记持业处相而转起的念。「于所缘」:即对于业处所缘。「坚固」:即坚定稳固。意思是,能使具念者生起近行定或安止定的那种定,也就是令定具有力量。显示巴利原文
Araññādikasseva bhāvanānurūpasenāsanataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassahī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Duddamo damathaṃ anupagato goṇo kūṭagoṇo. Dohanakāle yathā thanehi anavasesato khīraṃ na paggharati, evaṃ dohapaṭibandhinī kūṭadhenu. Rūpa-saddādike paṭicca uppajjanakaassādo rūpārammaṇādiraso. Pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇanti pabbajjato pubbe, anādimati vā saṃsāre paricitārammaṇaṃ. Nibandheyyāti bandheyya. Satiyāti sammadeva kammaṭṭhānassa sallakkhaṇavasena pavattāya satiyā. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe. Daḷhanti thiraṃ, yathā satokārissa upacārappanābhedo samādhi ijjhati, tathā thāmagataṃ katvāti attho.
「殊胜证得、现法乐住之基石」:即是一切诸佛、部分独觉佛,以及依其他业处证得殊胜的佛弟子们的现法乐住之基石。显示巴利原文
Visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānanti sabbesaṃ buddhānaṃ, ekaccānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ, buddhasāvakānañca visesādhigamassa aññena kammaṭṭhānena adhigatavisesānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārassa padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ.
世尊犹如一位善知宅地明术的老师,为诸修行者指示适宜的住处。比丘犹如虎豹,独处林中,以摧伏敌对烦恼而成就所欲之义利,故说‘最上果’,即指沙门果。‘精进速行堪能之地’,意为策发精进、令速行变得堪任的基础。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya bhagavā yogīnaṃ anurūpanivāsaṭṭhānupadisanato. Bhikkhu dīpisadiso araññe ekako viharitvā paṭipakkhanimmathanavasena icchitatthasādhanato phalamuttamanti sāmaññaphalaṃ sandhāya vadati. Parakkamajavayoggabhūminti bhāvanussāhajavassa yoggakaraṇabhūmibhūtaṃ.
若依长时间转起的入出息,则称为‘长入息、出息’;若依短时间转起的入出息,则称为‘短入息、出息’——当如此配合。‘如是而学’:即通过觉知入出息之长短、觉知全身、令粗显之相止息而修习;或指成为他们状态而令三学转起之人。‘入出息相’:指依入出息为缘而生起的似相。若取色法而入观,则以入出息为所缘,此即名为入出息业处行者;若取无色法而入观,则以禅支为所缘。‘事’(vatthu):即业所生的身体,是心与心所法转起的依处。无有其他有情、个体——此是清净见,即:‘此唯是法,非无因生,亦非以自在天等不平等因生,而是以无明等为因。’于三时中,亦由度疑清净而断除疑惑。如‘凡有比丘缘色……’的方式,通过蕴聚思惟而确立三相,依生灭随观等令观增长,次第趣入圣道阶位。显示巴利原文
Addhānavasena pavattānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ vasena dīghaṃ vā assasanto, ittaravasena pavattānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ vasena rassaṃ vā assasantoti yojanā. Evaṃ sikkhatoti assāsapassāsānaṃ dīgharassatāpajānanasabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedanaoḷārikoḷārikapaṭippassambhanavasena bhāvanaṃ sikkhato, tathābhūto vā hutvā tisso sikkhā pavattayato. Assāsapassāsanimitteti assāsapassāsasannissayena upaṭṭhitapaṭibhāganimitte. Assāsapassāse pariggaṇhāti rūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto, yo ‘‘assāsapassāsakammiko’’ti vutto. Jhānaṅgāni pariggaṇhāti arūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo cittacetasikānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Añño satto vā puggalo vā natthīti visuddhidiṭṭhi ‘‘tayidaṃ dhammamattaṃ, na ahetukaṃ, nāpi issarādivisamahetukaṃ, atha kho avijjādihetuka’’nti addhāttayepi kaṅkhāvitaraṇena vitiṇṇakaṅkho. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci bhikkhu rūpa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.361; 2.113; 3.86, 89; paṭi. ma. 1.54) nayena kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā. Udayavayānupassanādivasena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento. Anukkamena maggapaṭipāṭiyā.
‘或于他人入出息身’:此语是依思惟转起而说;若依于止,则于他人入出息身中,安止相毕竟不生。‘不置心’(aṭṭhapetvā):意为不于中间舍置其心,即无间断地安住。‘不断转起时’,即指于内法、外法中,修习无有间断而转起的那段时间。然而,同一时刻实无法兼得二者,故说‘于内,于外’;此二法合说,即表不能在同一时刻取为一个所缘,也就是不可同时俱取之意。显示巴利原文
‘‘Parassa vā assāsapassāsakāye’’ti idaṃ sammasanavāravasenāyaṃ pāḷi pavattāti katvā vuttaṃ, samathavasena pana parassa assāsapassāsakāye appanānimittuppatti eva natthi. Aṭṭhapetvāti antarantarā na ṭhapetvā. Aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakāloti ajjhattabahiddhādhammesupi nirantaraṃ vā bhāvanāya pavattanakālo kathito. Ekasmiṃ kāle panidaṃ ubhayaṃ na labbhatīti ‘‘ajjhattaṃ, bahiddhā’’ti ca vuttaṃ idaṃ dhammadvayaṃ ghaṭitaṃ ekasmiṃ kāle ekato ārammaṇabhāvena na labbhati, ekajjhaṃ ālambituṃ na sakkāti attho.
‘集’(samudayo):因从此处生起,故称为集;此即以因之义而为法,故说‘集法’。入出息的生起因,即是业生身等;随观彼者,为‘集法随观者’。为以比喻说明彼集法,而说‘犹如’等语。其中,‘风箱’(bhastaṃ)指皮袋,‘吼筒’(gaggaranāḷi)指风箱的吹管,‘他们’(te)指业生身等。正如入出息身凭借业生身等而关联,因业生身等是彼相的因;同样,业生身等亦凭借入出息身而关联,以入出息身为相的因。因此可以说‘身中的集法’,故说‘集……被称为’。或者,‘法’字有时表示本性,如‘生法’等词,即‘于诸缘和合时,于身中生起、有生起本性之身随观者’,亦称为‘集法随观者’。由是而说‘业生身’等。如此解释,‘于身’(kāyasmiṃ)这一依主释便极为契合。显示巴利原文
Samudeti etasmāti samudayo, so eva kāraṇaṭṭhena dhammoti samudayadhammo. Assāsapassāsānaṃ uppattihetu karajakāyādi, tassa anupassanasīlo samudayadhammānupassī, taṃ pana samudayadhammaṃ upamāya dassento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhastanti ruttiṃ. Gaggaranāḷinti ukkāpanāḷiṃ. Teti karajakāyādike. Yathā assāsapassāsakāyo karajakāyādisambandhī taṃnimittatāya, evaṃ karajakāyādayopi assāsapassāsakāyasambandhino taṃnimittabhāvenāti ‘‘samudayadhammā kāyasmi’’nti vattabbataṃ labhantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘samudaya…pe… vuccatī’’ti. Pakativācī vā dhamma-saddo ‘‘jātidhammāna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.131; 3.310; paṭi. ma. 1.33) viyāti kāyassa paccayasamavāye uppajjanakapakatikāyānupassī vā ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī’’ti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘karajakāyañcā’’tiādi. Evañca katvā kāyasminti bhummavacanaṃ suṭṭhutaraṃ yujjati.
‘灭法随观者’:此处,虽然坏灭本身无因,但当某些因法不存时,彼法便不存;此不存在的状态,即假说为彼不存的因。因此,假说业生身等的不存在,是入出息身坏灭的因。故说‘犹如风箱’等。以上是依第一种解释阐明含义。若依第二种解释,则无需假说即可领会。显示巴利原文
Vayadhammānupassīti ettha ahetukattepi vināsassa yesaṃ hetudhammānaṃ abhāve yaṃ na hoti, tadabhāvo tassa abhāvassa hetu viya voharīyatīti upacārato karajakāyādiabhāvo assāsapassāsakāyassa vayakāraṇaṃ vutto. Tenāha ‘‘yathā bhastāyā’’tiādi . Ayaṃ tāvettha paṭhamavikappavasena atthavibhāvanā. Dutiyavikappavasena upacārena vināyeva attho veditabbo.
犹如内、外随观,因所依的境不同,集法随观与灭法随观亦无法在同一时刻生起,故说‘有时随观集,有时随观灭’。‘有身’(atthi kāyo)——此中的‘唯’字(eva-saddo)虽略而不显,实即‘唯有身’;既说‘唯有身’,以决定遮除来显示,故说‘非有情’等。其义为:于色等诸法上,由执著有情、令他人执著,或结合情爱功德等,而被假立为‘有情’的;又因充满有情群聚及生死流转之性质,而称为‘补特伽罗’;因在此处结生、被压迫而称‘女人’;因在前分存在、转起而称‘男人’;因在此处安立我慢而称‘我’;因我所性而称‘我所’;因非他故称‘我’;因执为我所故称‘我所’;因离上述状态而成为他,故称‘某’;因属彼故称‘某某’——如是种种假立全不存在,唯有‘身’而已。依此十句,唯独显示身的我空与我所空。如此,便是‘唯有身’等所描述的状态。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattabahiddhānupassanā viya bhinnavatthuvisayatāya samudayavayadhammānupassanāpi ekakāle na labbhatīti āha ‘‘kālena samudayaṃ kālena vayaṃ anupassanto’’ti. ‘‘Atthi kāyo’’ti eva-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti ‘‘kāyova atthī’’ti vatvā avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ dassento ‘‘na satto’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yo rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya, paresañca sajjāpanaṭṭhena, satvaguṇayogato vā ‘‘satto’’ti parehi parikappito, tassa sattanikāyassa pūraṇato ca cavanupapajjanadhammatāya galanato ca ‘‘puggalo’’ti, thīyati saṃhaññati ettha gabbhoti ‘‘itthī’’ti, puri pure bhāge seti pavattatīti ‘‘puriso’’ti, āhito ahaṃ māno etthāti ‘‘attā’’ti, attano santakabhāvena ‘‘attaniya’’nti, paro na hotīti katvā ‘‘aha’’nti, mama santakanti katvā ‘‘mamā’’ti, vuttappakāravinimutto aññoti katvā ‘‘kocī’’ti, tassa santakabhāvena ‘‘kassacī’’ti, vikappetabbo koci natthi, kevalaṃ ‘‘kāyo eva atthī’’ti. Dasahipi padehi attattaniyasuññatameva kāyassa vibhāveti. Evanti ‘‘kāyova atthī’’tiādinā vuttappakārena.
“为智量者”指为令身随观念的智慧达到最上标准。“为念量者”指为令摄持身之念、持续转起的念达到最上标准。因为依前所说的方法,“有身”之念依无间次第生起而现前,这更是为令智与念于此大力增长。故说“为增长念与正知”。由于此修习直接与渴爱、邪见的执取相对立,所以说“住于远离渴爱……”。处于此状态者,于世间不见有任何可执取为“我”或“我所”,又岂会执取?故说“亦无任何……”等。此中“pi”字,乃表示汇集前文未说之义,因而依更上一层的含义而言,如“即使是与畜生道的雌性交合,此人也犯波罗夷(他胜罪)”之例。“evanti”则是对如此所述的行为样态作回顾,以成结论,故说“然而以此……显示”。显示巴利原文
Ñāṇapamāṇatthāyāti kāyānupassanāñāṇaṃ paraṃ pamāṇaṃ pāpanatthāya. Satipamāṇatthāyāti kāyapariggāhikaṃ satiṃ pavattanasatiṃ paraṃ pamāṇaṃ pāpanatthāya. Imassa hi vuttanayena ‘‘atthi kāyo’’ti aparāparuppattivasena paccupaṭṭhitā sati bhiyyoso mattāya tattha ñāṇassa, satiyā ca paribrūhanāya hoti. Tenāha ‘‘satisampajaññānaṃ vuḍḍhatthāyā’’ti. Imissā bhāvanāya taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhānaṃ ujupaṭipakkhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhā…pe… viharatī’’ti. Tathābhūto ca loke kiñcipi ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā gahetabbaṃ na passati, kuto gaṇheyyāti āha ‘‘na ca kiñcī’’tiādi. Evampīti ettha pi-saddo heṭṭhā niddiṭṭhassa tādisassa atthassa abhāvato avuttasamuccayatthoti dassento ‘‘upari atthaṃ upādāyā’’ti āha yathā ‘‘antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi, ayampi pārājiko hotī’’ti. (Pārā. 42) evanti pana niddiṭṭhākārassa paccāmasanaṃ nigamanavasena katanti āha ‘‘iminā pana…pe… dassetī’’ti.
因为此处所指是前分的念处,故说“念是苦谛”。而此念所依之“有身”,能令其生起的是渴爱,此渴爱亦有能令其生起之因,无彼因则彼亦不生,故说“能令其生起的是过去的渴爱”,正如“以行为缘”(《中部》3.126;《自说》1;《分别论》484)所说。以彼识为种子、以彼相续而生的整个世间识流,依经即称为“以行为缘而有识”。所谓“不转起”,即不转起之相,也就是两者不转起之相的意思。或可说,因在此处不再转起,故称不转起。“了知苦者”等语,是为显示圣道必定依完成四种任务的方式而转起。其修习与通达虽未明言,然已成立。以四谛为所缘的业处作为门径。“提升”:依清净次第向上登进,将修习推向更高,这是它的含义。“出离之门”:即从轮回之苦中解脱的方法。显示巴利原文
Pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānassa idha adhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sati dukkhasacca’’nti. Sā pana sati yasmiṃ attabhāve, tassa samuṭṭhāpikā taṇhā, tassāpi samuṭṭhāpikā eva nāma hoti tadabhāve abhāvatoti āha ‘‘tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā’’ti, yathā ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; udā. 1; vibha. 484). Taṃviññāṇabījataṃsantatisambhūto sabbopi lokiyo viññāṇappabandho ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ’’ tveva vuccati suttantanayena. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavattiyā nimittabhūtoti attho. Na pavattati etthāti vā appavatti. ‘‘Dukkhaparijānano’’tiādi ekantato catukiccasādhanavaseneva ariyamaggassa pavattīti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Avuttasiddho hi tassa bhāvanāpaṭivedho. Catusaccavasenāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānavasena. Ussakkitvāti visuddhiparamparāya āruhitvā, bhāvanaṃ upari netvāti attho. Niyyānamukhanti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇūpāyo.
威仪段注释显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathapabbavaṇṇanā
375 “以威仪”:威仪指行动、活动,但此处特指身体的动作。行动的路径、活动的过程称为“威仪”,即依行、住、坐、卧等方式现起的身体状态。当众生行走、站立、坐着或躺卧时,他以身体做种种动作;这里是依这些威仪、依威仪的分类而说。“再者”:再进一步,除了前文所说的入出息业处,我还要宣说其他更多的身念处业处——请谛听,这是此处之意趣。“行走时”等语,既适用于仅知道行走者,也适用于了知行走殊胜相者。其中,仅知“行走”并非此处所要,了知行走的殊胜相方是。为分析显示此点,故说“于此,如何”等。“补特伽罗的所得”:指认定“有补特伽罗存在”,也就是对补特伽罗的执取。他不舍弃、未彻底断除“我走,我的行走”这种执取,因为该执取存在。因此,他不破除、不去除“有我、有作者、有受者”如是转起的颠倒想,因为无有对治,或未依之随修。对于这样的人,何来业处等情况?故说“无有业处或念处修习”。然而,对……显示巴利原文
375.Iriyāpathavasenāti iriyanaṃ iriyā, kiriyā, idha pana kāyikapayogo veditabbo. Iriyānaṃ patho pavattimaggoti iriyāpatho, gamanādivasena pavattā sarīrāvatthā. Gacchanto vā hi satto kāyena kātabbakiriyaṃ karoti ṭhito vā nisinno vā nipanno vāti, tesaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ vasena, iriyāpathavibhāgenāti attho. Puna caparanti puna ca aparaṃ, yathāvuttaānāpānakammaṭṭhānato bhiyyopi aññaṃ kāyānupassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ kathemi, suṇāthāti vā adhippāyo . ‘‘Gacchanto vā’’tiādi gamanādimattajānanassa, gamanādigatavisesajānanassa ca sādhāraṇavacanaṃ, tattha gamanādimattajānanaṃ na idha nādhippetaṃ, gamanādigatavisesajānanaṃ pana adhippetanti taṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha kāma’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sattūpaladdhinti ‘‘satto atthī’’ti upaladdhiṃ sattaggāhaṃ. Na pajahati na pariccajati ‘‘ahaṃ gacchāmi, mama gamana’’nti gāhasabbhāvato. Tato eva attasaññaṃ ‘‘atthi attā kārako vedako’’ti evaṃ pavattaṃ viparītasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti nāpaneti appaṭipakkhabhāvato, ananubrūhanato vā. Evaṃ bhūtassa cassa kuto kammaṭṭhānādibhāvoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hotī’’ti. ‘‘Imassa panā’’tiādi sukkapakkho, tassa vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Tameva hi atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「谁在行走?」这是将行动者与行为视为不可分离,针对行走这一行为提问行动者,目的在于否定「我」为行动者,从而显示唯有诸法在行走。「谁的行走?」则是用另一种方式表达同一意义,将行动者与行为分开,旨在阐明行走行为与行动者并无关联。因为「谁」这个词在这两种问法中,都含有否定的意涵。「以何因行走?」则是在否定了行动者之后,针对行走行为,问其不颠倒的原因。因为这种所谓的「行走」,并非如「自我与意结合,意与诸根结合,诸根与自身结合」等错误因缘所造成,而是诸法远离了这些错误因缘,依恰当的缘与因而转起的行相差别。因此说「于此」等。显示巴利原文
Tattha ko gacchatīti sādhanaṃ, kiriyañca avinibbhuttaṃ katvā gamanakiriyāya kattupucchā, sā kattubhāvavisiṭṭhaattapaṭikkhepatthā dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhidassanato. Kassa gamananti tamevatthaṃ pariyāyantarena vadati sādhanaṃ, kiriyañca vinibbhuttaṃ katvā gamanakiriyāya akattusambandhībhāvavibhāvanato. Paṭikkhepatthañhi antonītaṃ katvā ubhayatthaṃ kiṃ-saddo pavatto. Kiṃ kāraṇāti pana paṭikkhittakattukāya gamanakiriyāya aviparītakāraṇapucchā. Idañhi gamanaṃ nāma attā manasā saṃyujjati, mano indriyehi, indriyāni attehīti evamādi micchākāraṇavinimuttaanurūpapaccayahetuko dhammānaṃ pavattiākāraviseso. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi.
没有任何众生或人在行走,唯是诸法在行走,离开这些诸法,别无任何行走者。今为显示「唯是诸法在行走」,故说「由心作用之风界的扩散」等。其中,「心作用风界扩散」是指心之作用,也是风界的扩散与悸动,以此而动作。此中,以「心作用」一词,遮除了不依根门而起的风界扩散;以「风界扩散」一词,遮除了以思、语表等为差别的心作用;依此二者,便开显了身表。说「行走」之后,为显示当身体如此活动时,世间便安立「行走」的名称,故说「因此」等。「那」:依欲行走之意愿而生起的心。「起风」:生起以风界增胜的色聚,此中「增胜」是就其能力而言,非就数量而言。能令俱生色身僵硬、扶持并推动的缘,随特殊行相而转起的风界——对此,便说为行走心生起的「风引发表」。因为与意图共存的殊胜变化即是表。而说「风」者,也是依照前说的增胜性,并非说唯有风界是生起者,否则表作为所造色的地位便难以成立。引导向前方,即身体向前方转起,这被称为「前进」。显示巴利原文
Na koci satto vā puggalo vā gacchati dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhito, tabbinimuttassa ca kassaci abhāvato. Idāni dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cittakiriyāvāyodhātuvipphārenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha cittakiriyā ca sā, vāyodhātuyā vipphāro vipphandanañcāti cittakiriyāvāyodhātuvipphāro, tena. Ettha ca cittakiriyaggahaṇena anindriyabaddhavāyodhātuvipphāraṃ nivatteti, vāyodhātuvipphāraggahaṇena cetanāvacīviññattibhedaṃ cittakiriyaṃ nivatteti, ubhayena pana kāyaviññattiṃ vibhāveti. ‘‘Gacchatī’’ti vatvā yathā pavattamāne kāye ‘‘gacchatī’’ti vohāro hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tanti gantukāmatāvasena pavattacittaṃ. Vāyaṃ janetīti vāyodhātuadhikaṃ rūpakalāpaṃ uppādeti, adhikatā cettha sāmatthiyato, na pamāṇato. Gamanacittasamuṭṭhitaṃ sahajātarūpakāyassa thambhanasandhāraṇacalanānaṃ paccayabhūtena ākāravisesena pavattamānaṃ vāyodhātuṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vāyo viññattiṃ janetī’’ti. Adhippāyasahabhāvī hi vikāro viññatti. Yathāvuttaadhikabhāveneva ca vāyogahaṇaṃ , na vāyodhātuyā eva janakabhāvato, aññathā viññattiyā upādāyarūpabhāvo durupapādo siyā. Purato abhinīhāro puratobhāgena kāyassa pavattanaṃ, yo ‘‘abhikkamo’’ti vuccati.
以「此即其理趣」这一总括之语简略说完后,为详细开显其义,便说「因为在此也一样」等。「从尖端开始」:从最低的尖端开始,亦即从脚掌开始。「耸立的状态」:即高耸的状态。显示巴利原文
‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti atidesena saṅkhepato vatvā tamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tatrāpi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Koṭito paṭṭhāyāti heṭṭhimakoṭito paṭṭhāya pādatalato paṭṭhāya. Ussitabhāvoti ubbiddhabhāvo.
「这样了知者」:指了知“行走等运动仅是心造风界的扩散”之人。为了使这种了知成为决断,世间不如实知的人们,或因邪执,或因随顺世俗言说,而有“是这样”等思察。而“有吗?”是以自己如此审察的方式而发问的表述。“没有”:是以决断的方式否定众生实有的表述。至于“然而,正如……”等,则是通过譬喻阐明其义,这很容易理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pajānatoti evaṃ cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva gamanādi hotīti pajānato. Tassa evaṃ pajānanāya nicchayagamanatthaṃ ‘‘evaṃ hotī’’ti vicāraṇā vuccati loke yathābhūtaṃ ajānantehi micchābhinivesavasena, lokavohāravasena vā. Atthi panāti attano evaṃ vīmaṃsanavasena pucchāvacanaṃ. Natthīti nicchayavasena sattassa paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. ‘‘Yathā panā’’tiādi tasseva atthassa upamāya vibhāvanaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
「船因风力」:犹如无心的船乘风驶往他方,又如无心的箭藉弓弦之力射向他方;同样,此无心之身被风所驱动,由前述之风引导而移至他方。应当如此理解譬喻的关联。若有人说:“如船与箭需依推动者——男人的力量方能前往他方,身体也是如此。”即便这样认为,亦无不可。因为船与箭是依赖具有和合相的男人之力而移动,并非依赖无和合相者;身体亦同理。这对我们有何损失呢?反而更确立了只是诸法作用的立场,而非人的主张。因此说「依于机械线」等。显示巴利原文
Nāvā mālutavegenāti yathā acetanā nāvā vātavegena desantaraṃ yāti, yathā ca acetano tejanaṃ kaṇḍo jiyāvegena desantaraṃ yāti, tathā acetano kāyo vātāhato yathāvuttavāyunā nīto desantaraṃ yātīti evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sace pana koci vadeyya ‘‘yathā nāvātejanānaṃ pellakassa purisassa vasena desantaragamanaṃ, evaṃ kāyassāpī’’ti, hotu, evaṃ icchito vāyamattho yathā hi nāvātejanānaṃ saṃhatalakkhaṇasseva purisassa vasena gamanaṃ, na asaṃhatalakkhaṇassa, evaṃ kāyassāpīti. Kā no hāni, bhiyyopi dhammamattatāva patiṭṭhaṃ labhati, na purisavādo. Tenāha ‘‘yantasuttavasenā’’tiādi.
这里的「被驱使」指如前所述,通过行走等活动而被诸缘所驱动。「站立」即站着。「在此」指于此世间。「无有因缘」指离于想要行走的心、彼心俱生风界等因缘。「应站」指将会站着,但实际无法站住。「应行」指将会行走、将会移动,此句应与“谁能”连起来理解。这里的“谁”字有否定的意味。应知,通过否定无因缘而能站立或行走,凸显了一切法的运作都依于缘。如此,不仅阐明了无我性,同时也阐明了无常性与苦性。显示巴利原文
Tattha payuttanti heṭṭhā vuttanayena gamanādikiriyāvasena paccayehi payojitaṃ. Ṭhātīti tiṭṭhati. Etthāti imasmiṃ loke. Vinā hetupaccayeti gantukāmatācittataṃsamuṭṭhānavāyodhātuādihetupaccayehi vinā. Tiṭṭheti tiṭṭheyya. Vajeti vajeyya gaccheyya ko nāmāti sambandho. Paṭikkhepattho cettha kiṃ-saddoti hetupaccayavirahena ṭhānagamanapaṭikkhepamukhena sabbāyapi dhammappavattiyā paccayādhīnavuttitāvibhāvanena attasuññatā viya aniccadukkhatāpi vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbā.
“被安置”:指依种种缘、以种种方式而被安置、确立。“总摄语”:即总括所有四种威仪而说的一句话。因前面已分别解说诸威仪,此处是将它们总摄起来,以一言表述,这便是其义。又或者,前一种解说以威仪为主,彼处身为次要,随顺而起;而在这里,为了显示身为主、威仪转成次要及随顺,故说第二种解说方式——应知此二种解说方式的差别即在于此。“住于”:指正在转起、进行的状态。显示巴利原文
Paṇihitoti yathā yathā paccayehi pakārehi nihito ṭhapito. Sabbasaṅgāhikavacananti sabbesampi catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ ekajjhaṃ saṅgaṇhanavacanaṃ, pubbe visuṃ visuṃ iriyāpathānaṃ vuttattā idaṃ nesaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vacananti attho. Purimanayo vā iriyāpathappadhāno vuttoti tattha kāyo appadhāno anunipphādīti idha kāyaṃ padhānaṃ, apadhānañca iriyāpathaṃ anunipphādiṃ katvā dassetuṃ dutiyanayo vuttoti evampettha dvinnaṃ nayānaṃ viseso veditabbo. Ṭhitoti pavatto.
对威仪的把握,实即对具有威仪的色身本身的把握,因威仪是色身的不同特定状态,故说“通过把握威仪,他于身,作为身随观而安住”。正因如此,此处唯就色蕴而引出“集”等内容。此理同样适用于其余诸分。所谓“以”,此处的“以”字涵盖了这样的四种行相:正如通过“由渴爱集、由业集、由食集”而观见生起之相者,他亦在观见色蕴的生起;同样地,通过“由无明灭”等,亦含摄五种行相,当如此理解。其余解释则同前所述。显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathapariggaṇhanampi iriyāpathavato kāyasseva pariggaṇhanaṃ tassa avatthāvisesabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘iriyāpathapariggaṇhanena kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti. Tenevettha rūpakkhandhavaseneva samudayādayo uddhaṭā. Esa nayo sesavāresupi. Ādināti ettha ādi-saddena yathā ‘‘taṇhāsamudayā kammasamudayā āhārasamudayā’’ti nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passatīti ime cattāro ākārā saṅgayhanti, evaṃ ‘‘avijjānirodhā’’ti ādayopi pañca ākārā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
四正知部分的注释显示巴利原文
Catusampajaññapabbavaṇṇanā
376 “依四正知”:从各方面、以种种方式而了知,或殊胜地、特别地了知,故名“正知者”;正知者的状态即是“正知”,指如是转起的智慧。由于手势动作等内容各各不同,将四种正知合而为一,便称为“四正知”,此处是依于它而说。“于前进”等语,在《沙门果经》的注释中已作解释,此处不应再释,因此于各处解释中,对于词义的阐明,亦应依彼处所确立的理趣而取。由“于前进、后退时,为正知而行者”等语,通过把握前进等四种正知,此处唯对色身本身,方说为随观集与灭等,故说“唯应引出色蕴的集与灭”。因为前进等,正是色法转起行相的特殊形态。其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
376.Catusampajaññavasenāti samantato pakārehi, pakaṭṭhaṃ vā savisesaṃ jānātīti sampajāno, sampajānassa bhāvo sampajaññaṃ, tathāpavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ, hatthavikārādibhedabhinnattā cattāri sampajaññāni samāhaṭāni catusampajaññaṃ, tassa vasena. ‘‘Abhikkante’’tiādīni sāmaññaphale (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.214; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.214 vākyakhandhepi) vaṇṇitāni, na puna vaṇṇetabbāni, tasmā taṃtaṃsaṃvaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanāpi tattha vihitanayeneva gahetabbā. ‘‘Abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotī’’tiādi vacanato abhikkamādigatacatusampajaññapariggaṇhanena rūpakāyassevettha samudayadhammānupassitādi adhippetoti āha ‘‘rūpakkhandhasseva samudayo ca vayo canīharitabbo’’ti. Rūpadhammānaṃyeva hi pavattiākāravisesā abhikkamādayoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
不净作意部分的注释显示巴利原文
Paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
377 「依不净作意」:因其应被厌离,故为「不净」;凡具不净自性、不净相状者,将其置于心中作意,即依此作意。即便省略了表示状态的词,状态之义也能被领会,如说「白布」一般。因在《清净道论》中已有说明,故应依彼论及其注释中所说的理则,了知「即此身」等义。显示巴利原文
377.Paṭikkūlamanasikāravasenāti jigucchanīyatāya paṭikūlameva paṭikkūlaṃ, yo paṭikkūlasabhāvo paṭikkūlākāro, tassa manasi karaṇavasena. Antarenāpi hi bhāvavācinaṃ saddaṃ bhāvattho viññāyati yathā ‘‘paṭassa sukka’’nti. Yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.182) vuttaṃ, tasmā tattha, taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.182 ādayo) vuttanayena ‘‘imameva kāya’’nti ādīnamattho veditabbo.
将布等做成袋状而捆扎成的容器,即是「袋」。种种相状共杂一处,这便是在譬喻种种颜色的毛发等。显现时分,即超越了概念之后,毛发等不净相状现前之时。为显示iti字有相状之义,先说「如是」,再具体显示彼相状,而说「以把握毛发等」。因为对于名为毛发等的不净物,其极其恶臭、可厌、不净之相状,从聚集而随观,即是此处的身随观。其余如前所说。显示巴利原文
Vatthādīhi pasibbakākārena bandhitvā kataṃ āvāṭanaṃ putoḷi. Nānākārā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne sammissāti ettāvatā nānāvaṇṇānaṃ kesādīnañca upameyyatā. Vibhūtakāloti paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamitvā kesādīnaṃ asubhākārassa upaṭṭhitakālo. Iti-saddassa ākāratthataṃ dassento ‘‘eva’’nti vatvā taṃ ākāraṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘kesādipariggaṇhanenā’’tiādimāha. Kesādisaññitānañhi asucibhāvānaṃ paramaduggandhajegucchapaṭikkūlākārassa samudayato anupassanā idha kāyānupassanāti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
界作意段的注释显示巴利原文
Dhātumanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
378 「以界作意」:即以地界等四界为所缘而生起的修习作意,也就是四界分别的意思。界作意、界业处、四界分别,在意义上实为同一。屠牛者,即为谋生而宰牛者。近住弟子,即因工作而住其近旁、依彼而活者。刺穿后,即于一处相互刺穿。大路中间处,即四衢街口的中央,因他们正以彼处为刺穿之处而成为中间。由于那四条大路从四方而来,于彼处交汇,故彼处为四衢街口,于彼四衢街口中。‘住立’一词,在「住立或」等句中,因具足名为住处的威仪,或因ṭhā字根有遮止行走之义,于他处表示遮止行走而具足其余威仪,但此处则意指随宜显示色身转起之相状,故说「因以四种威仪中任一种相状而住立故,如已住立,如已安立」。其中,以相状,即以住等色身转起之相状。因为住等,是名为威仪的动作之道、转起之路,故说为「威仪」,此义已明。如已住立,即如已转起,此处意指如前所说的住立即是专注,故说「如已住立故,如已安立」。或者,「住立」是显示与名为住处的威仪相应,「安立」是显示与其他威仪相应。又或者,「住立」是显示名为色身的色法,于各个刹那依各自作用而安立。显示巴利原文
378.Dhātumanasikāravasenāti pathavīdhātuādikā catasso dhātuyo ārabbha pavattabhāvanāmanasikāravasena, catudhātuvavatthānavasenāti attho. Dhātumanasikāro, dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ, catudhātuvavatthānanti hi atthato ekaṃ. Goghātakoti jīvikatthāya gunnaṃ ghātako. Antevāsikoti kammakaraṇavasena tassa samīpavāsī taṃ nissāya jīvanako . Vinivijjhitvāti ekasmiṃ ṭhāne aññamaññaṃ vinivijjhitvā. Mahāpathānaṃ vemajjhaṭṭhānasaṅkhāteti catunnaṃ mahāpathānaṃ tāya eva vinivijjhanaṭṭhānatāya vemajjhasaṅkhāte. Yasmā te cattāro mahāpathā catūhi disāhi āgantvā tattha samohitā viya honti, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ catumahāpathaṃ, tasmiṃ catumahāpathe. Ṭhita-saddo ‘‘ṭhito vā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.263; a. ni. 5.28) ṭhānasaṅkhātairiyāpathasamaṅgitāya, ṭhā-saddassa vā gatinivattiatthatāya aññattha ṭhapetvā gamanaṃ sesairiyāpathasamaṅgitāya bodhako, idha pana yathā tathā rūpakāyassa pavattiākārabodhako adhippetoti āha ‘‘catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ yena kenaci ākārena ṭhitattā yathā ṭhita’’nti. Tattha ākārenāti ṭhānādinā rūpakāyassa pavattiākārena. Ṭhānādayo hi iriyāpathasaṅkhātāya kiriyāya patho pavattimaggoti ‘‘iriyāpatho’’ti vuccantīti vutto vāyamattho. Yathāṭhitanti yathāpavattaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ ṭhānamevettha paṇidhānanti adhippetanti āha ‘‘yathā ṭhitattā ca yathāpaṇihita’’nti. ‘‘Ṭhita’’nti vā kāyassa ṭhānasaṅkhātairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ, ‘‘paṇihita’’nti tadaññairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhita’’nti vā kāyasaṅkhātānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe sakiccavasena avaṭṭhānaparidīpanaṃ, paṇihitanti paccayavasena tehi tehi paccayehi pakārato nihitaṃ paṇihitanti evampettha attho veditabbo. Paccavekkhatīti pati pati avekkhati, ñāṇacakkhunā vinibbhujjitvā visuṃ visuṃ passati.
现在,为以修习之义阐明前说,而说“犹如屠牛者”等。其中,“饲养者”是指为了增长肌肉、使其肥壮,用米糠、饭、棉籽等喂养它的人。“被杀死的”是指被杀死而死亡。而“死”是指刚刚死去,因此说“刚死”。“牛想未消失”:牛虽刚死,因其肢体的形态尚未坏灭,故牛想尚未消失。“分解、破裂、分离”者,即指部分:将va变为ba,i变为ī。“部分地”:即一部分一部分地。“分别后”:即从骨聚中将肉剔出,或将剔出的肉分成块,因此说“肉想现起”。对于尚未把握业处的比丘而言,“破除密集”:即对相续密集、聚集密集、作用密集进行分解、辨别。“以界观察”:即通过破除密集,对地界等诸界各别各别地观察的人。“有情想”:他们说,基于我见而生起的有情想,在如实成就破除密集时,即使依世俗而生的有情想也会消失,这是合理的。正因如此,所说的譬喻义与所譬喻义才完全相应契合,因此说“唯以界而心住立”。“善巧者”:即对这些名称善巧的人,因为他了知:“如同在屠牛场中,当尾、蹄、角等及骨、肉等部分的聚集尚未分离时,有牛想;分离后便无,而有骨、肉等部分想。”四衢道口如同四威仪:显示巴利原文
Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ bhāvatthavibhāvanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā goghātakassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha posentassāti maṃsūpacayaparibrūhanāya kuṇḍakabhattakappāsaṭṭhiādīhi saṃvaḍḍhentassa. Vadhitaṃ matanti hiṃsitaṃ hutvā mataṃ. Matanti ca matamattaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tāvadevā’’ti. Gāvīti saññā na antaradhāyatīti yāni aṅgapaccaṅgāni yathāsanniviṭṭhāni upādāya gāvīsamaññā matamattāyapi gāviyā tesaṃ taṃsannivesassa avinaṭṭhattā. Vilīyanti bhijjanti vibhujjantīti bīlā, bhāgā va-kārassa ba-kāraṃ, ikārassa ca īkāraṃ katvā. Bīlasoti bīlaṃ bīlaṃ katvā. Vibhajitvāti aṭṭhisaṅghātato maṃsaṃ vivecetvā, tato vā vivecitaṃ maṃsaṃ bhāgaso katvā. Tenevāha ‘‘maṃsasaññā pavattatī’’ti. Pabbajitassāpi apariggahitakammaṭṭhānassa. Ghanavinibbhoganti santatisamūhakiccaghanānaṃ vinibbhujjanaṃ vivecanaṃ. Dhātusopaccavekkhatoti ghanavinibbhogakaraṇena dhātuṃ dhātuṃ pathavīādidhātuṃ visuṃ visuṃ katvā paccavekkhantassa. Sattasaññāti attānudiṭṭhivasena pavattā sattasaññāti vadanti, vohāravasena pavattasattasaññāyapi tadā antaradhānaṃ yuttameva yāthāvato ghanavinibbhogassa sampādanato. Evañhi sati yathāvuttaopammatthena upameyyattho aññadatthu saṃsandati sameti. Tenevāha ‘‘dhātuvaseneva cittaṃ santiṭṭhatī’’ti. Dakkhoti cheko taṃtaṃsamaññāya kusalo ‘‘yathājāte sūnasmiṃ naṅguṭṭhakhuravisāṇādivante aṭṭhimaṃsādiavayavasamudāye avibhatte gāvīsamaññā, na vibhatte. Vibhatte pana aṭṭhimaṃsādiavayavasamaññā’’ti jānanato. Catumahāpatho viya catuiriyāpathoti gāviyā ṭhitacatumahāpatho viya kāyassa pavattimaggabhūto catubbidho iriyāpatho yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.305) vitthāritā, tasmā tattha, taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.306) vuttanayena veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
九墓地段注释显示巴利原文
Navasivathikapabbavaṇṇanā
379 “墓地段”:这是结集者们采用的名称,指那些与弃置在墓地的肿胀相等相关的、分门别类讲说的教导,以及这些肿胀等不净相所指的内容。因此说“以墓地段来分别”。“死后过了一日”:即死去一天之后。“命根耗尽之后”:即死亡以后。“隆起”:即膨胀鼓起。“膨胀相”:因不断向上膨胀而肿胀。“青瘀”:即夹杂白红色而变异成的青色,或由原来颜色变异成的青色。“青瘀”即青瘀:其中的ka音只是词的增长,无别义,如同“黄”、“红”等。“厌恶”:即令人厌嫌。或者,此ka音表示卑劣义,如“恶名声扬起”,以此显示“卑劣的青瘀”。“破处”:指被乌鸦、苍鹭等啄食之处。“流脓”:即流着脓,四处滴淌的状态。“如是状态”:即那种流脓的情形。显示巴利原文
379. Sivathikāya apaviddhauddhumātakādipaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ odhiso pavattānaṃ kathānaṃ, tadabhidheyyānañca uddhumātakādiasubhabhāgānaṃ sivathikapabbānīti saṅgītikārehi gahitasamaññā . Tenāha ‘‘sivathikapabbehi vibhajitu’’nti. Maritvā ekāhātikkantaṃ ekāhamataṃ. Uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānāti jīvitakkhayato upari maraṇato paraṃ. Samuggatenāti samuṭṭhitena. Uddhumātattāti uddhaṃ uddhaṃ dhumātattā sūnattā. Setarattehi viparibhinnaṃ vimissitaṃ nīlaṃ vinīlaṃ, purimavaṇṇavipariṇāmabhūtaṃ vā nīlaṃ vinīlaṃ. Vinīlameva vinīlakanti ka-kārena padavaḍḍhanaṃ anatthantarato yathā ‘‘pītakaṃ lohitaka’’nti (dha. sa. 616). Paṭikkūlattāti jigucchanīyattā. Kucchitaṃ vinīlanti vinīlakanti kucchanattho vā ayaṃ ka-kāroti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti. (Dī. ni. 3.316; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285) paribhinnaṭṭhānehi kākakaṅkādīhi. Vissandamānapubbanti vissavantapubbaṃ, tahaṃ tahaṃ paggharantapubbanti attho. Tathābhāvanti vissandamānapubbabhāvaṃ.
“那位比丘”:即前文所说“应见弃于墓地之尸”的那位比丘。他将自身与之作类比。“此身也”等语,正是显示类比的方式。“命”:指色命根,而这里的非色命根只是随识而转。“暖”:是业生火界。“如是实为腐臭性”:意思是,其本性即是如此极度恶臭、令人厌嫌、不净、腐败,并非如命等未离时那样仅有少许。“将成为如是”:即“将成为如是肿胀等相”。显示巴利原文
Sobhikkhūti yo ‘‘passeyya sarīraṃ sivathikāya chaḍḍita’’nti vutto, so bhikkhu. Upasaṃharati sadisataṃ. ‘‘Ayampi kho’’tiādi upasaṃharaṇākāradassanaṃ. Āyūti rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, arūpajīvitindriyaṃ panettha viññāṇagatikameva. Usmāti kammajatejo. Evaṃ pūtikasabhāvoyevāti evaṃ ativiya duggandhajegucchapaṭikkūlapūbhikasabhāvo eva, na āyuādīnaṃ avigame viya mattasoti adhippāyo. Ediso bhavissatīti evaṃbhāvīti āha ‘‘evaṃ uddhumātādibhedo bhavissatī’’ti.
拔取又拔取:即一再拔除、撕扯。有残肉血:因未被完全吞食,各处还附着些许残余的血肉。“以另一手骨”:此处显示手骨普遍散乱,为说明其散乱无余,故接着说“乃至六十四部分”等。显示巴利原文
Luñcitvā luñcitvāti uppāṭetvā uppāṭetvā. Sāvasesamaṃsalohitayuttanti sabbaso akhāditattā tahaṃ tahaṃ sesena appāvasesena maṃsalohitena yuttaṃ. ‘‘Aññena hatthaṭṭhika’’nti avisesena hatthaṭṭhikānaṃ vippakiṇṇatā jotitāti anavasesato tesaṃ vippakiṇṇataṃ dassento ‘‘catusaṭṭhibhedampī’’tiādimāha .
经年:指经过了一年,即已超过一载。这里,年久失去坚固而变得粉碎的状态,即是腐坏。为显示此种状态,故说“在露天处”等。只是经年:指那些仅仅超过一年左右的。对于第二墓地等,是以被吞食等状态来确定的,因此说“应配合被吞食(等状态)来理解”。显示巴利原文
Terovassikānīti tirovassaṃ gatāni, tāni pana saṃvaccharaṃ vītivattāni hontīti āha ‘‘atikkantasaṃvaccharānī’’ti. Purāṇatāya ghanabhāvavigamena vicuṇṇatā idha pūtibhāvoti so yathā hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘abbhokāse’’tiādimāha. Terovassikānevāti saṃvaccharamattātikkantāni eva. Khajjamānatādivasena dutiyasivathikapabbādīnaṃ vavatthāpitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘khajjamānatādīnaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā’’ti.
通过“这二种”的限定,将安止业处确定于此,因为其余部分并无安止。由于有“唯”字,便在别处作限定,因此,(墓地段与威仪段)这二分作为观业处的特性也不应被否定,应知因其显示了无常等。显示诸行过患的正是墓地段,所以说“是以对墓地的过患随观来宣说的”。威仪段等能导向安止,这是很明显的,故说“其余十二部分”。至于此处文义上未详加说明的部分,都是容易理解的。显示巴利原文
Imāneva dveti avadhāraṇena appanākammaṭṭhānaṃ tattha niyameti aññapabbesu tadabhāvato. Yato hi eva-kāro, tato aññattha niyameti, tena pabbadvayassa vipassanākammaṭṭhānatāpi appaṭisiddhā daṭṭhabbā aniccatādidassanato. Saṅkhāresu ādīnavavibhāvanāni sivathikapabbānīti āha ‘‘sivathikānaṃ ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttattā’’ti. Iriyāpathapabbādīnaṃ appanāvahatā pākaṭā evāti ‘‘sesāni dvādasapī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.
受随观注释(Vedanānupassanāvaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
Vedanānupassanāvaṇṇanā
380 “乐受”一词中,“乐”是令快乐的意思,即令相应法及身体获得喜乐。或者,“乐”是很好地啃噬、挖掘身心的苦患。又有人说:“容易提供宣泄机会的,就是乐”。受,即感受、领纳所缘之味。正在感受,就是在领纳。至于“欲”等,应按威仪段所说的方式来理解。具正知者的感受,即称为“具正知的感受”。显示巴利原文
380.Sukhaṃvedananti ettha sukhayatīti sukhā. Sampayuttadhamme, kāyañca laddhassāde karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khādati, khanati vā kāyikaṃ, cetasikañcābādhanti sukhā. ‘‘Sukaraṃ okāsadānaṃ etissāti sukhā’’ti apare. Vedayati ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavatīti vedanā. Vedayamānoti anubhavamāno. ‘‘Kāma’’ntiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ iriyāpathapabbe vuttanayameva. Sampajānassa vediyanaṃ sampajānavediyanaṃ.
“依处所缘”即色等所缘。在此,因色等所缘是受生起的立足处,故被称作“依处”。“他的”意为“应有”。为显示除了法本身作为作者,并无其他作者,故说“只有受在感受”。而通过“仅是言说”一句,则揭示出“正在感受乐受,我感受乐受”这类说法,仅仅是一种世俗表达。显示巴利原文
Vatthuārammaṇāti rūpādiārammaṇā. Rūpādiārammaṇañhettha vedanāya pavattiṭṭhānatāya ‘‘vatthū’’ti adhippetaṃ . Assāti bhaveyya. Dhammavinimuttassa kattu abhāvato dhammasseva kattubhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘vedanāva vedayatī’’ti āha. ‘‘Vohāramattaṃ hotī’’ti etena ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti idaṃ vohāramattanti dasseti.
「呻吟者」:在感受强力的冲击止息时,见到了其中也有过患,为了给它宣泄的机会而呻吟。因为若强行抑制感受的冲击,会产生极大的痛苦,还可能引生其他异状,因此那位长老辗转反侧。「运用精进与止的平衡」:由于安忍的精进力过于强盛,通过减弱它而使定与之平衡,这便称为运用精进与止的平衡。「与无碍解一起」:指与出世间的无碍解一起。在圣道生起的刹那,无碍解以无迷乱的方式通达,同时,义无碍解也以作为所缘的方式成就。又或者,在世间的无碍解生起之时,它也同样具备相应的能力,因此说‘与无碍解一起’。‘等首’:指成为等首,意思是于省察刹那之后的那个刹那,便进入了般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Nitthunantoti balavato vedanāvegassa nirodhane ādīnavaṃ disvā tassa avasaradānavasena nitthunanto . Vegasandhāraṇe hi atimahantaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjatīti aññampi vikāraṃ uppādeyya, tena thero aparāparaṃ parivattati. Vīriyasamathaṃ yojetvāti adhivāsanavīriyassa adhimattattā tassa hāpanavasena samādhinā samarasatāpādanena vīriyasamathaṃ yojetvā. Saha paṭisambhidāhīti lokuttarapaṭisambhidāhi saha. Ariyamaggakkhaṇe hi paṭisambhidānaṃ asammohavasena adhigamo, atthapaṭisambhidāya pana ārammaṇakaraṇavasenapi. Lokiyānampi vā sati uppattikāle tattha samatthataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saha paṭisambhidāhī’’ti. Samasīsīti vārasamasīsī hutvā, paccavekkhaṇavārassa anantaravāre parinibbāyīti attho.
正如对乐受所说的那样,对苦受也是如此:‘谁感受苦’等,同样是就具正知的感受而言。其中,所谓‘苦’,即“使之痛苦”,意思是折磨、逼恼相应的法以及身体。或者,‘恶劣地啃咬、挖掘身心的安乐’,所以称为苦。也有人说:‘难以获得宣泄机会的受,即是苦’。‘非色业处’:指对非色的把握,也就是依非色法门而投入观照。由于触与心并不明显,因此也就不显著。所以说‘犹如黑暗一般’。‘不显著’这句话,是针对那类人说的,对他们而言,一开始受会明显地现前。这样一来,与《帝释问经》注释等处所说的‘触为显著,识为显著’,便没有矛盾了。依受来教导业处是显著的——这是其中的连结。‘因为受的生起是明显的’:这是依乐受与苦受而言。因为这两种受的现起是粗重的,而另一种(不苦不乐受)则不是如此。又或者,通过把握了那两种受,对智者而言,另一种受的现起也就变得明显了,因此,对于‘受’不加区别地予以把握,也应当如此理解。应当按照《帝释问经》中所说的方法去了解,因此,其中应知的义理差别,当依《随眠发光》中的方法去把握。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca sukhaṃ, evaṃ dukkhanti yathā ‘‘sukhaṃ ko vedayatī’’tiādinā sampajānavediyanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, evaṃ dukkhampi. Tattha dukkhayatīti dukkhā, sampayuttadhamme, kāyañca pīḷeti vibādhatīti attho. Duṭṭhuṃ vā khādati, khanati kāyikaṃ, cetasikañca sātanti dukkhā. ‘‘Dukkaraṃ okāsadānaṃ etissāti dukkhā’’ti apare. Arūpakammaṭṭhānanti arūpapariggahaṃ, arūpadhammamukhena vipassanābhinivesananti attho. Na pākaṭaṃ hoti phassassa, cittassa ca avibhūtākārattā. Tenāha ‘‘andhakāraṃ viya khāyatī’’ti. ‘‘Na pākaṭaṃhotī’’ti ca idaṃ tādise puggale sandhāya vuttaṃ, tesaṃ ādito vedanāva vibhūtatarā hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Evañhi yaṃ vuttaṃ sakkapañhavaṇṇanā dīsu ‘‘phasso pākaṭo hoti, viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotī’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.359) taṃ avirodhitaṃ hoti. Vedanāvasena kathiyamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Vedanānaṃ uppattipākaṭatāyā’’ti ca idaṃ sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Tāsañhi pavatti oḷārikā, na itarāya. Tadubhayaggahaṇamukhena vā gahetabbattā itarāyapi pavatti viññūnaṃ pākaṭā evāti ‘‘vedanāna’’nti avisesaggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sakkapañhe vuttanayeneva veditabbo, tasmā tattha vattabbo atthaviseso tattha līnatthappakāsaniyaṃ vuttanayeneva gahetabbo.
先前曾说过“以依处为所缘,唯有受在感受”,这是就受依于所缘而转起及其无我性来显示通达。现在,为显示对受的无常等通达,便指出“这是另一种通达的方式”。正如在一个心识刹那中,两个心识不可能同时生起,因为不具有多种同时俱存的缘;同样地,两种受也不可能同时生起,因为它们各自都依于特定的所缘而转起。因此才说“在乐受的刹那,苦受是不存在的”。这仅仅是举例,实际上在那一刻,不苦不乐受也同样不存在。如此一来,在乐受生起的刹那,通过了知其他过去存在过的受现在已经不存在,也就了知了乐受本身也是曾存在而又消失的。因此,为了显示乐受的明显性,才特别说“而且,这个乐受在此之前并不存在”。由此,也显示了其他受的明显性。所以,结论便是“受确实是无常、不稳固、变易之法”。以‘无常’一语,显示出受的坏灭性,因为在坏灭之时,无常才容易了知;以‘不稳固’一语,显示了它的明显性,因为它并非恒常存在;以‘变异’一语,则显示了它的苦性,因为它表示变成其他状态。由此,乐受本身也成为苦,更何况其他受,这就揭示了三受皆为苦。这样,“凡是无常的,即是苦;凡是苦的,必定是无我”,便阐明了对三受中三相的完整通达。因此说:“如此,他便在这……”显示巴利原文
Pubbe ‘‘vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatī’’ti vedanāya ārammaṇādhīnavuttitāya ca anattatāya ca pajānanaṃ vuttaṃ, idāni tassā aniccatādipajānanaṃ dassento ‘‘ayaṃ aparopi pajānanapariyāyo’’ti āha. Yathā ekasmiṃ khaṇe cittadvayassa asambhavo ekajjhaṃ anekantapaccayābhāvato, evaṃ vedanādvayassa visiṭṭhārammaṇavuttito cāti āha ‘‘sukhavedanākkhaṇe dukkhāya vedanāya abhāvato’’ti. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ tadā upekkhāvedanāyapi abhāvato, tena sukhavedanākkhaṇe bhūtapubbānaṃ itaravedanānaṃ hutvāabhāvapajānanena sukhavedanāyapi hutvā abhāvo ñāto eva hotīti tassā pākaṭabhāvameva dassento ‘‘imissā casukhāya vedanāya ito paṭhamaṃabhāvato’’ti āha, eteneva ca tāsampi vedanānaṃ pākaṭabhāvo dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vedanā nāma aniccā adhuvā vipariṇāmadhammā’’ti. Aniccaggahaṇena hi vedanānaṃ viddhaṃsanabhāvo dassito viddhaste aniccatāya suviññeyyattā. Adhuvaggahaṇena pākaṭabhāvo tassa asadābhāvitādibhāvanato. Vipariṇāmaggahaṇena dukkhabhāvo tassa aññathattadīpanato, tena sukhāpi vedanā dukkhā, pageva itarāti tissannampi vedanānaṃ dukkhatā dassitā hoti. Iti ‘‘yadaniccaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ ekantato anattā’’ti tīsupi vedanāsu lakkhaṇattayapajānanā jotitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘itiha tattha sampajāno hotī’’ti.
现在为以经典证成此义,便说“此亦已宣说”等。其中,“于彼时不感受苦受”的意思是:在乐受相应之时,不感受苦受,因为过去的苦受已灭、未来的苦受尚未生起;而现在的苦受不可能同时存在,这已如前说。它仅住于自作用之一刹那,故为“无常”;由众缘和合而造作,故为“有为”;依于依处、所缘等缘而生起,故为“缘生”;其本性即坏灭、消逝、崩解、止灭,故为“坏法”“灭法”“离贪法”“灭尽法”,应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ suttena (ma. ni. 2.205) sādhetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha neva tasmiṃ samaye dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedetīti tasmiṃ sukhavedanāsamaṅgisamaye neva dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti niruddhattā, anuppannattā ca yathākkamaṃ atītānāgatānaṃ. Paccuppannāya pana asambhavo vutto eva. Sakiccakkhaṇamattāvaṭṭhānato aniccā. Samecca sambhuyya paccayehi katattā saṅkhatā. Vatthārammaṇādipaccayaṃ paṭicca uppannattā paṭiccasamuppannā. Khayavayapalujjananirujjhanapakatitāya khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammāti daṭṭhabbā.
能为烦恼所触故,名为“染着”,即五种欲功德。以彼染着为所缘故,称为“有染着的”。因此他说:“依五种欲功德染着而住。”显示巴利原文
Kilesehi āmasitabbato āmisaṃ nāma, pañca kāmaguṇā, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena saha āmisehīti sāmisaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇāmisanissitā’’ti.
此后部分,是就“有受”等经句而言,因此说“与身随观中所说的方法相同”。显示巴利原文
Ito paranti ‘‘atthi vedanā’’ti evamādi pāḷiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayamevā’’ti.
心随观的解释显示巴利原文
Cittānupassanāvaṇṇanā
381 由于与贪相应而转起,故称为“有贪”。因此说“与贪俱行”。至于“离贪”,此处依语义虽应有与“有贪”相对的“离贪”一词,但因其针对的是思择行者的修行,唯取三地之心,所以在说明“世间善及无记”之后,又以“然而此”等句开显此意。其余两种瞋根及两种痴根,合为四种不善心。他们不与贪相应,故无“有贪”之义;若就其以贪为缘、与彼相应之时分上或亦可说有贪,故亦不属“离贪”。此处唯就解脱诸苦而言,故说“既不归前句,亦不入后句”。若尔,岂非堕入一边之见?不尔,以其属于苦故。亦有一些人执此见:“此处因不相应之形态未被把握,即执此不与贪相应为准则,如某些无记之心。”依他们所见,则其余不善心亦应摄于第二句。于第二双对中,亦当依所说之理而解其义。于不善根中,因与痴俱起,故称“有痴”,因此说“与疑俱行及与掉举俱行”。又因于此亦可定前句“与痴俱起即是有痴”,故说“然而以”等。由于极端愚显示巴利原文
381. Sampayogavasena pavattamānena saha rāgenāti sarāgaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘lobhasahagata’’nti. Vītarāganti ettha kāmaṃ sarāgapadapaṭiyoginā vītarāgapadena bhavitabbaṃ, sammasanacārassa pana adhippetattā tebhūmakasseva gahaṇanti ‘‘lokiyakusalābyākata’’nti vatvā ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādinā tameva adhippāyaṃ vivarati. Sesāni dve dosamūlāni, dve mohamūlānīti cattāri akusalacittāni. Tesañhi rāgena sampayogābhāvato nattheva sarāgatā, taṃnimittakatāya pana siyā taṃsahitakāle soti nattheva vītarāgatāpīti dukkhavinimuttatā evettha labbhatīti āha ‘‘neva purimapadaṃ na pacchimapadaṃ bhajantī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ padesikaṃ pajānanaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, dukantarapariyāpannattā tesaṃ. Ye pana ‘‘paṭipakkhabhāve agayhamāne sampayogābhāvo evettha pamāṇaṃ ekaccaabyākatānaṃ viyā’’ti icchanti, tesaṃ matena sesākusalacittānampi dutiyapadasaṅgaho veditabbo . Dutiyadukepi vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Akusalamūlesu saha moheneva vattatīti samohanti āha ‘‘vicikicchāsahagatañceva uddhaccasahagatañcā’’ti. Yasmā cettha ‘‘saheva mohenāti samoha’’nti purimapadāvadhāraṇampi labbhatiyeva, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Yathā pana atimūḷhatāya pāṭipuggalikanayena savisesamohavantatāya ‘‘momūhacitta’’nti vattabbato vicikicchāuddhaccasahagatadvayaṃ visesato ‘‘samoha’’nti vuccati, na tathā sesākusalacittānīti ‘‘vaṭṭantiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati. Sampayogavasena thinamiddhena anupatitaṃ anugatanti thinamiddhānupatitaṃ, pañcavidhaṃsasaṅkhārikākusalacittaṃ saṅkucitacittaṃ, saṅkucitacittaṃ nāma ārammaṇe saṅkocanavasena pavattanato. Paccayavisesavasena thāmajātena uddhaccena sahagataṃ saṃsaṭṭhanti uddhaccasahagataṃ, aññathā sabbampi akusalacittaṃ uddhaccasahagatamevāti. Pasaṭacittaṃ nāma ārammaṇe savisesaṃ vikkhepavasena visaṭabhāvena pavattanato.
因其具足镇伏烦恼之功、果报广大、相续长久,而达广大之性,故称“广大”;或由殊胜大士以炽盛意欲等所行、所修,故称“广大”。然此“广大”唯指摄属色界与无色界者,世间之中无有更大于此者。因此说“属色界、无色界”。与此相对者即是“小”,故云“非广大者即欲界”。“有上”:能与超胜于己者共存,故称“有上”。其对立面即是“无上”。此二应依上下语境而解其义,故说“有上者即欲界”等。以能镇伏相违品之定而善加安立,故名为“定”。因此说“于任何心”等。“于任何心”者,即对一切心而言。无有前述之定者,名为“未定”。故说“俱缺二种定者”。由彼分解脱而解脱者,为欲界善心;由镇伏解脱而解脱者,为广大心。此处即指此二,故云“以彼分解脱与镇伏解脱而解脱”。于无此二种解脱之处,即是“无此二种解脱”。如是作解时,于出世间心亦或生疑,为决其疑故,说“以断解脱……乃至……无容身之处”。又,此处所说“容身之处”,显示巴利原文
Kilesavikkhambhanasamatthatāya vipulaphalatāya ca dīghasantānatāya ca mahantabhāvaṃ gataṃ, mahantehi vā uḷāracchandādīhi gataṃ paṭipannanti mahaggataṃ, taṃ pana rūpārūpabhūmigataṃ tato mahantassa loke abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘rūpārūpāvacara’’nti. Tassa cettha paṭiyogī parittaṃ evāti āha ‘‘amahaggatanti kāmāvacara’’nti. Attānaṃ uttarituṃ samatthehi saha uttarehīti sauttaraṃ. Tappaṭipakkhena anuttaraṃ. Tadubhayaṃ upādāyupādāya veditabbanti āha ‘‘sauttaranti kāmāvacarantiādi. Paṭipakkhavikkhambhanasamatthena samādhinā sammadeva āhitaṃ samāhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yassā’’tiādi. Yassāti yassa cittassa. Yathāvuttena samādhinā na samāhitanti asamāhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayasamādhirahita’’nti. Tadaṅgavimuttiyā vimuttaṃ, kāmāvacarakusalacittaṃ, vikkhambhanavimuttiyā vimuttaṃ, mahaggatacittanti tadubhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttīhi vimutta’’nti. Yattha tadubhayavimutti natthi, taṃ ubhayavimuttirahitanti gayhamāne lokuttaracittepi siyāsaṅkāti taṃ nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘samuccheda…pe… okāsova natthī’’ti āha. Okāsabhāvo ca sammasanacārassa adhippetattā veditabbo. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānameva.
盖部分的解释显示巴利原文
Nīvaraṇapabbavaṇṇanā
382 从应断等法的差别显示来说,法随观被安立为五种——这一意义在经文中本身即可了知;为点明此义,所以说“以五种方式开示法随观”。若然如此,为何仅依盖等来说示呢?这是因为顺应所化众生的意乐。对于某些应化众生而言,在应断诸法中,首先需要以分别的方式解说盖,世尊为利益他们,便最初在盖中开示了法随观。同样,身随观也是以止为前行而开示的;此后,在应遍知的蕴与处、应修习的觉支,以及具备应遍知等分别的谛中,更进一步开示了教说。因此,即便这里也有修止,但那只是为了观的目的而被期求。念处的教说以观为核心、以观为多,为了显示它是从观专一的分别方式而开示的,所以说了“而且”等语。其中应知,这是以蕴、处、苦谛的方式,作了一种综摄把握的解说。而“也把握想、行蕴”中的“也”字,完整地统摄了对所有五取蕴的把握,因为其余(识等)都已涵摄其中了。显示巴利原文
382. Pahātabbādidhammavibhāgadassanavasena pañcadhā dhammānupassanā niddiṭṭhāti ayamattho pāḷito eva viññāyatīti tamatthaṃ ulliṅgento ‘‘pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ kathetu’’nti āha. Yadi evaṃ kasmā nīvaraṇādivaseneva niddiṭṭhanti? Vineyyajjhāsayato. Yesañhi veneyyānaṃ pahātabbadhammesu paṭhamaṃ nīvaraṇāni vibhāgena vattabbāni, tesaṃ vasenettha bhagavatā paṭhamaṃ nīvaraṇesu dhammānupassanā kathitā. Tathā hi kāyānupassanāpi samathapubbaṅgamā desitā, tato pariññeyyesu khandhesu, āyatanesu ca bhāvetabbesu bojjhaṅgesu, pariññeyyādivibhāgesu saccesu ca uttarā desanā, tasmā cettha samathabhāvanāpi yāvadeva vipassanatthā icchitā. Vipassanāpadhānā, vipassanābahulā ca satipaṭṭhānadesanāti tassā vipassanābhinivesavibhāgena desitabhāvaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha khandhāyatanadukkhasaccavasena missakapariggahakathanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saññāsaṅkhārakkhandhapariggahampīti pi-saddena sakalapañcupādānakkhandhapariggahaṃ sampiṇḍeti itaresaṃ tadantogadhattā.
由于在了知“黑法白法并不并起共存”的那一刻,那种了知并未现前,所以说“以常现行相”。所谓“现存者”,是指在自身相续中能被发现的。“如何”即“以此方式”;而因为前面已经说了“欲贪的生起”,所以这种方式正是欲贪生起的原因方式,就本质而言即是其原因,因此说“以何原因”。至于“与”字,则是用来总括接下来所说的义理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kaṇhasukkadhammānaṃ yuganandhatā natthī’’ti pajānanakāle abhāvā ‘‘abhiṇhasamudācāravasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Saṃvijjamānanti attano santāne upalabbhamānaṃ. Yathāti yenākārena, so pana ‘‘kāmacchandassa uppādo hotī’’ti vuttattā kāmacchandassa kāraṇākārova, atthato kāraṇamevāti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. Ca-saddo vakkhamānatthasamuccayattho.
“此处”,即指“如及”等文句中所说的词句。“净相”,也就是欲贪。因为欲贪依其被执取的方式而被称为“净”,并且此方式又成为转起其他欲贪的相,所以也称为“相”。“可爱者”,即是以可爱的方式被执取的色等净所缘。对于所期望的利益与安乐的生起,以不善巧的方式去作意,便是“非如理作意”。“彼”即指非如理作意。“于彼”,是指在作为同类因和作为所缘的这两种净相之中。所谓“食”,就是缘,因为它能带来其果。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādinā vuttapade. Subhampīti kāmacchandopi. So hi attano gahaṇākārena ‘‘subha’’nti vutto, tenākārena pavattanakassa aññassa kāmacchandassa nimittattā ‘‘nimitta’’nti ca. Iṭṭhaṃ, iṭṭhākārena vā gayhamānaṃ rūpādi subhārammaṇaṃ. Ākaṅkhitassa hitasukhassa pattiyā anupāyabhūto manasikāro anupāyamanasikāro. Tanti ayonisomanasikāraṃ . Tatthāti tasmiṃ sabhāgahetubhūte, ārammaṇabhūte ca duvidhe subhanimitte. Āhāroti paccayo attano phalaṃ āharatīti katvā.
此处,“不净”是不净禅那的省略。应当理解,此禅那以十种无识不净和头发等有识不净为所缘而转起。因为在《耆利摩难经》(增支部10.60)中,缘于头发等而生起的想,即称为“不净想”。应知,这里将四种不如理作意和如理作意都涵括进来,是为了毫无遗漏地显示;然而在这些不净中,作意“净”与作意“不净”才是此处所要取的,其他则因其随顺的关系而被顺便提出。显示巴利原文
Asubhanti asubhajjhānaṃ uttarapadalopena, taṃ pana dasasu aviññāṇakaasubhesu ca kesādīsu saviññāṇakaasubhesu ca pavattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kesādīsu hi saññā ‘‘asubhasaññā’’ti girimānandasutte (a. ni. 10.60) vuttā. Ettha ca catubbidhassa ayonisomanasikārassa, yonisomanasikārassa ca gahaṇaṃ niravasesadassanatthaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tesu pana asubhesu ‘‘subha’’nti, ‘‘asubha’’nti ca manasikāro idhādhippeto, tadanukūlattā pana itare pīti.
于十一种不净中,把握其厌逆相,或依取相生起时的情形而行持,这便是“把握不净相”。修习能引生近行与安止的不净业处,即是“不净修习的实践”。所谓:“于食知量、节制饮食者,因未为惛沉睡眠所压倒,爱欲便无隙生起,故而爱欲得以舍断。”此义在分别中亦会说到。然而,若人完全了知食物的可厌、其所转化物的可厌、依彼而生起的极度可厌,以及身体藉由食物维持的实情,则凭借对食物之量的全然了知,他被称为“于食知量者”。因为如此之人,爱欲确已舍断。显示巴利原文
Ekādasasu asubhesu paṭikkūlākārassa uggaṇhanaṃ, yathā vā tattha uggahanimittaṃ uppajjati, tathā paṭipatti asubhanimittassa uggaho. Upacārappanāvahāya asubhabhāvanāya anuyuñjanā asubhabhāvanānuyogo. ‘‘Bhojane mattaññuno mitāhārassa thinamiddhābhibhavābhāvā otāraṃ alabhamāno kāmacchando pahīyatī’’ti vadanti, ayameva ca attho niddesepi vuccati. Yo pana bhojanassa paṭikkūlataṃ, tabbipariṇāmassa tadādhārassa tassa ca upanissayabhūtassa ativiya jegucchataṃ, kāyassa ca āhāraṭṭhitikattaṃ sammadeva jānāti, so sabbaso bhojane pamāṇassa jānanena bhojanemattaññū nāma. Tādisassa hi kāmacchando pahīyateva.
不净行者帝须长老是见到齿骨之人。所言“已舍断”,是指以镇伏的方式舍断。自此以后,于类似情形,皆循此理。依阿毗达摩的教导(《法集论》1159, 1503),一切贪皆属欲贪盖,故说“以阿拉汉道”。显示巴利原文
Asubhakammikatissatthero dantaṭṭhidassāvī. Pahīnassāti vikkhambhanavasena pahīnassa. Ito paresupi evarūpesu ṭhānesu eseva nayo. Abhidhammapariyāyena (dha. sa. 1159, 1503) sabbopi lobho kāmacchandanīvaraṇanti āha ‘‘arahattamaggenā’’ti.
嗔也是如此:先前生起的嗔,由于成为之后生起之嗔的因,故称“嗔相”。显示巴利原文
Paṭighampi purimuppannaṃ paṭighanimittaṃ parato uppajjanakassa paṭighassa kāraṇanti katvā.
“Mejjati”(润滑)即是“siniyhati”(变得湿润),因此称为“友”(mitto),指追求利益的人。存在于彼友中,或属于友的,便是“慈”(mettā),即寻求利益的状态。就慈而言,由于是通称,近行与安止皆可适用。当说“心解脱”时,唯安止适用,因未达安止时,不可能善巧地从对立烦恼中解脱。“彼”(taṃ)指如理作意。“于彼处”(tattha)即在此慈中。“屡屡转起”(bahulaṃ pavattayato)即多修习者。显示巴利原文
Mejjati siniyhatīti mitto, hitesī puggalo, tasmiṃ mitte bhavā, mittassa vā esāti mettā, hitesitā, tassā mettāya. Appanāpi upacāropi vaṭṭati sādhāraṇavacanabhāvato. ‘‘Cetovimuttī’’ti vutte appanāva vaṭṭati appanaṃ appattāya paṭipakkhato suṭṭhu muccanassa abhāvato. Tanti yonisomanasikāraṃ. Tatthāti mettāya. Bahulaṃ pavattayatoti bahulīkāravato.
对于有情修习慈时,利益供给的生起与转起,即是慈相的把握。最初生起的慈之作意,由于成为之后生起的慈的因,所以慈之作意本身就是慈相。“业是自己所有”者,即业所有的有情;此状态即业所有性、业继承性。在嗔与慈中,如理审察过患与功德的思量,在此即是审察。具备慈住善知识的状态,在此即是善知识性。所谓“有限制、无限制、方向的遍满”(《中部注》1.115):以自己、极爱者、同伴、中立者、怨敌为对象而有有限制性;当界限被破除时,则为无限制性。以一方、多方遍满,在慈的把握中应知为方向的遍满。或依寺院、道路、村庄等而有有限制的方向遍满;不限定寺院等对象,仅以东方等方向而有的,即是无限制的方向遍满。如此,针对两种把握而说“有限制、无限制、方向的遍满”。所说的把握,应视为直至近行为止。对已把握者一再修习,即是修习。其中,以一切有情、生类、存在、人、有身所摄者,有此五类;对每一类,愿无怨仇、愿无瞋害、愿无恼苦、愿安乐自护,以此四种方式转起,成为二十种无限制遍满慈。一切女性、男性、圣者、凡夫、天、人、堕恶趣者,依有情分类而有七种,或二十八种;依十方方位分类而有十种;或在每一方中,再以有情等、女性等、无怨等作区分,则成为四百八十种有限制遍满,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Sattesu mettāyanassa hitūpasaṃhārassa uppādanaṃ pavattanaṃ mettānimittassa uggaho, paṭhamuppanno mettāmanasikāro parato uppajjanakassa kāraṇabhāvato mettāmanasikārova mettānimittaṃ. Kammameva sakaṃ etesanti kammassakā, sattā, tabbhāvo kammassakatā, kammadāyādatā. Dosamettāsu yāthāvato ādīnavānisaṃsānaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ vīmaṃsā idha paṭisaṅkhānaṃ. Mettāvihārikalyāṇamittavantatā idha kalyāṇamittatā. Odissakaanodissakadisāpharaṇānanti (odhisakaanodhisakadisāpharaṇānaṃ ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.115) attaatipiyasahāyamajjhattaverivasena odissakatā, sīmāsambhede kate anodissakatā. Ekādidisāpharaṇavasena disāpharaṇatā mettāya uggahaṇe veditabbā. Vihāraracchāgāmādivasena vā odissakadisāpharaṇaṃ. Vihārādiuddesarahitaṃ puratthimādidisāvasena anodissakadisāpharaṇanti evaṃ dvidhā uggahaṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘odissakaanodissakadisāpharaṇāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Uggahoti ca yāva upacārā daṭṭhabbo. Uggahitāya āsevanā bhāvanā. Tattha sabbe sattā, pāṇā, bhūtā, puggalā, attabhāvapariyāpannāti etesaṃ vasena pañcavidhā, ekekasmiṃ averā hontu , abyāpajjhā, anīghā, sukhī attānaṃ pariharantūti catudhā pavattito vīsatividhā anodissakapharaṇā mettā. Sabbā itthiyo, purisā, ariyā, anariyā, devā, manussā, vinipātikāti sattodhikaraṇavasena pavattā sattavidhā, aṭṭhavīsati vidhā vā, dasahi disāhi disodhikaraṇavasena pavattā dasavidhā, ekekāya vā disāya sattādiitthādiaverādibhedena asītādhikacatusatappabhedā ca odhiso pharaṇā veditabbā.
由不如理作意而生起不喜等,此不如理作意即于不喜等中的不如理作意。此处为依主释,因他们是由它产生的。其余诸处亦同此理。“厌倦”指于边远坐卧处及殊胜善法,生起不愿进一步修习的状态。“身弯曲”指物质身体以异常方式弯曲。“退缩相”即蜷缩之相。显示巴利原文
Yena ayonisomanasikārena aratiādikāni uppajjanti, so aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikāro. Tena nipphādetabbe hi idaṃ bhummaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Ukkaṇṭhitā pantasenāsanesu, adhikusaladhammesu ca uppajjanabhāvariñcanā. Kāyavinamanāti karajakāyassa virūpenākārena namanā. Līnākāroti saṅkocāpatti.
由于具有建立善法修持、令他们对立者枯竭的特性,这种从发勤界等开始运作的精进,便称为“初发勤精进”。因为仅是初发精进时,尚无摧破懈怠与获得强力,故说“由从懈怠出离,故比彼更强”。然而,由于一再策励而得修习,能次第增进,变得极为强力,故说“由次第升进,故比彼更强”。显示巴利原文
Kusaladhammapaṭipattiyā paṭṭhapanasabhāvatāya, tappaṭipakkhānaṃ visosanasabhāvatāya ca ārambhadhātuādito pavattavīriyanti āha ‘‘paṭhamārambhavīriya’’nti. Yasmā paṭhamārambhamattassa kosajjavidhamanaṃ, thāmagamanañca natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kosajjato nikkhantatāya tato balavatara’’nti . Yasmā pana aparāparuppattiyā laddhāsevanaṃ uparūpari visesaṃ āvahantaṃ ativiya thāmagatameva hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavatara’’nti.
“过量进食中的取相”指在过量进食中执取昏沉睡眠之相,即对于所食之量,能把握“食此量时,此食成为昏沉睡眠的因;食此量时,则不成为因”,如此把握昏沉睡眠的因与非因。这是从遮止的角度表述的,因此当说“食此量时,此食不成为昏沉睡眠的因”时,实际上也显示了饮食知量的道理。所以说“四五口……则不成为因”。“白天的日光相”指即使在夜间,也作意于白天所取的日光相,应如此理解此义。由于头陀支依于精进,故说“亦依于与头陀支相应的适当谈话”。显示巴利原文
Atibhojane nimittaggāhoti atibhojane thinamiddhassa nimittaggāho , ettake bhutte taṃ bhojanaṃ thinamiddhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, ettake na hotīti thinamiddhassa kāraṇākāraṇagāho hotīti attho. Byatirekavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘‘ettake bhutte taṃ bhojanaṃ thinamiddhassa kāraṇaṃ na hotī’’ti bhojane mattaññutā ca atthato dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catupañca…pe… na hotī’’ti. Divā sūriyālokanti divā gahitanimittaṃ sūriyālokaṃ rattiyaṃ manasi karontassāpīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Dhutaṅgānaṃ vīriyanissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhutaṅganissitasappāyakathāyapī’’ti.
悔也因追悔已作与未作而转起,由此导致心不寂静,故与掉举特征相同。因此说:“所谓不寂静,即不寂静之状态,其实体正是掉举与悔。”显示巴利原文
Kukkuccampi katākatānusocanavasena pavattamānaṃ cetaso avūpasamāvahatāya uddhaccena samānalakkhaṇamevāti ‘‘avūpasamo nāma avūpasantākāro, uddhaccakukkuccamevetaṃ atthato’’ti vuttaṃ.
对于多闻者而言,他审察经典等的文句与义理,并大多安住于此,由此获得了义解等成就,因此不会散乱;他又依正确的方法修行,持续发起与自身相应的精进,所以不会对已做与未做之事追悔。因此说:“由多闻……掉举与悔得以断除。”应当理解,从多闻断除掉举与悔的那一刻起,由好提问与精通律也同样能断除它们。再者,亲近长老能成就长老的操行,由此使内心得到平静,故也说这能断除掉举与悔。然而,不应只看年纪大,而应理解为:那些能驱除悔的持律者、善知识,才是此处所说的。另外,出家人的散乱多由悔所引起,所以经中才以“常好询问适宜不适宜者”等,依律的方式来显示好提问等特质。在“已断除的掉举与悔”这一句中,用依处格来显示区别。因为悔是与忧俱行的,所以说,由不来道断除之后,它在未来便不会再生起。显示巴利原文
Bahussutassa ganthato, atthato ca suttādīni vicārentassa tabbahulavihārino atthavedādipaṭilābhasabbhāvato vikkhepo na hotīti, yathāvidhipaṭipattiyā, yathānurūpapatikārappavattiyā ca katākatānusocanañca na hotīti ‘‘bāhusaccenapi…pe… uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyatī’’ti āha. Yadaggena bāhusaccena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati, tadaggena paripucchakatāvinayapakataññutāhipi taṃ pahīyatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuddhasevitā ca vuddhasīlitaṃ āvahatīti cetovūpasamakarattā uddhaccakukkuccappahānakārī vuttā. Vuddhattaṃ pana anapekkhitvā kukkuccavinodakā vinayadharā kalyāṇamittā vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Vikkhepo ca pabbajitānaṃ yebhuyyena kukkuccahetuko hotīti ‘‘kappiyākappiyaparipucchābahulassā’’tiādinā vinayanayeneva paripucchakatādayo niddiṭṭhā. Pahīne uddhaccakukkucceti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Kukkuccassa domanassasahagatattā anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo vutto.
“疑的所依处”:疑在其中停留、转起,故名疑的所依处,也就是作为疑之因的诸法。或者,“所依”指停留,疑以此作为所依,故称疑的所依处。从义理上说,这指的正是疑本身。因为先前生起的那个疑,对于之后将生起的疑而言,由于是同类因,所以是不共之因。显示巴利原文
Tiṭṭhati pavattati etthāti ṭhānīyā vicikicchāya ṭhānīyā vicikicchāṭhānīyā, vicikicchāya kāraṇabhūtā dhammā, tiṭṭhatīti vā ṭhānīyā, vicikicchā ṭhānīyā etissāti vicikicchāṭhānīyā, atthato vicikicchā eva. Sā hi purimuppannā parato uppajjanakavicikicchāya sabhāgahetutāya asādhāraṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ.
善与不善:由善巧而生,故名为善;与其相违,故为不善。凡不善者,有过失、不应修习、是低劣的;凡善者,无过失、应修习、是殊胜的。又,善法若以低劣的意欲等发起,便为低劣;若以殊胜的意欲等发起,便为殊胜。“黑”者,即污黑,能使心失去光辉;“白”者,即洁白,能使心变得光辉。或说,因是导致投生黑道之因,故名为黑;因是导致投生白道之因,故名为白。它们正是相互对立的。因为黑法直接与白法对立,故黑法以白法为其对立面;同样,白法也以黑法为其对立面。或者说,黑与白即互为对立。譬如,乐受是苦受的对立面,苦受也是乐受的对立面。显示巴利原文
Kusalākusalāti kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena kusalā, tappaṭipakkhato akusalā. Ye akusalā, te sāvajjā, asevitabbā, hīnā ca. Ye kusalā, te anavajjā, sevitabbā,paṇītā ca. Kusalā vā hīnehi chandādīhi āraddhā hīnā, paṇītehi paṇītā. Kaṇhāti kāḷakā cittassa apabhassarabhāvakaraṇā. Sukkāti odātā cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇā. Kaṇhābhijātihetuto vā kaṇhā. Sukkābhijātihetuto sukkā. Te eva sappaṭibhāgā. Kaṇhā hi ujuvipaccanīkatāya sukkasappaṭibhāgā, tathā sukkāpi itarehi. Atha vā kaṇhasukkā ca sappaṭibhāgā ca kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā. Sukhā hi vedanā dukkhāya vedanāya sappaṭibhāgā, dukkhā ca vedanā sukhāya vedanāya sappaṭibhāgāti.
虽然凭借多闻与好问,一切八事所起的疑皆可断除,然而由于其余的疑均以对三宝的疑为根本,故说“缘于三宝”。若如实通达三宝的功德,便不可能生起“于大师有疑”等这些疑。对律的精熟,能断除名为“于学处有疑”的那种疑,因此论中说:“亦由对律修习自在。”至于“对名为净信的胜解成就多修习者”,这是指于可净信的对象,以称为信的那种深入胜解而常修习之人。应知,此处的胜解即指能引发确定的作用;或者说,那种倾向于信、心所欣乐的意向,即是胜解。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ bāhusaccaparipucchakatāhi sabbāpi aṭṭhavatthukā vicikicchā pahīyati, tathāpi ratanattayavicikicchāmūlikā sesavicikicchāti katvā āha ‘‘tīṇi ratanāni ārabbhā’’ti. Ratanattayaguṇāvabodhe ‘‘satthari kaṅkhatī’’tiādi (dha. sa. 1008, 1123, 1167, 1241, 1263, 1270; vibha. 915) vicikicchāya asambhavoti. Vinaye pakataññutā ‘‘sikkhāya kaṅkhatī’’ti vuttāya vicikicchāya pahānaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘vinaye ciṇṇavasībhāvassāpī’’ti. Okappaniyasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhabahulassāti saddheyyavatthuno anupavisanasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhena adhimuccanabahulassa, adhimuccanañca adhimokkhuppādanamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, saddhāya vā ninnapoṇatāadhimutti adhimokkho.
“集灭”:即具有集与灭的法。“于净相、不净相等中”:这里的“等”字应分别连接,即“于净相等中”和“于不净相等中”。其中,第一个“等”字含摄了嗔恚相等,第二个“等”字含摄了慈心解脱等。其余应说之义,亦如前理可知。显示巴利原文
Samudayavayāti samudayavayadhammā. Subhanimittaasubhanimittādīsūti ‘‘subhanimittādīsu asubhanimittādīsū’’ti ādi-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha paṭhamena ādi-saddena paṭighanimittādīnaṃ saṅgaho, dutiyenamettācetovimuttiādīnaṃ. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttanayameva.
「蕴品」的解释。显示巴利原文
Khandhapabbavaṇṇanā
383 383. 依于诸取,或以作为所缘等方式而被执取的蕴,即是取蕴。显示巴利原文
383. Upādānehi ārammaṇakaraṇādivasena upādātabbā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā.
关于‘Iti rūpaṃ’:此处‘iti’一词与‘idaṃ’同义,故意为‘此色’。因其总摄自性相,故能无余遍取,因此说‘此即是色,唯此而已,别无他色’。或者,‘iti’是表示类别的虚词,故‘iti rūpaṃ’即以此显示:通过四大种与所造色等的分类,总括色的所有类别,无余遍取而作开示。所谓‘自性相’,即依能变坏的自性,以及眼等、颜色等的自性。对于受等,亦应以此类推,配合‘这是受,此即是受,唯此而已,别无他受,依自性相了知受’等文句;其所指的自性相,即是领纳的自性、苦乐等的自性,应如此配合。其余部分,依前文所述之理即易明了。显示巴利原文
Itirūpanti ettha iti-saddo idaṃ-saddena samānatthoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘idaṃ rūpa’’nti. Tayidaṃ sarūpaggahaṇabhāvato anavasesapariyādānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito paraṃ rūpaṃ atthī’’ti. Itīti vā pakāratthe nipāto, tasmā ‘‘iti rūpa’’nti iminā bhūtupādādivasena yattako rūpassa pabhedo, tena saddhiṃ rūpaṃ anavasesato pariyādiyitvā dasseti. Sabhāvatoti ruppanasabhāvato, cakkhādivaṇṇādisabhāvato ca. Vedanādīsupīti ettha ‘‘ayaṃ vedanā, ettakā vedanā, na ito paraṃ vedanā atthīti sabhāvato vedanaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā, sabhāvatoti ca ‘‘anubhavanasabhāvato, sātādisabhāvato cā’’ti evamādinā yojetabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva.
「处品」的注释。显示巴利原文
Āyatanapabbavaṇṇanā
384 384. 对于‘于六内、六外处’这句,其中的‘chasū’一词,应分别配于六内处与六外处,即‘于六内处、于六外处’。为何这两类都各说六处呢?是为了界定六识身生起的门与所缘。因为,属于眼识路历程的识身,唯以眼处为生起之门,也唯以一处——色处——为所缘;对于其余的(耳、鼻、舌、身)识身,也应如此对应各自的处所。而第六识身,则以意处,也就是被称为有分意的那一分,为生起之门,并可依止不共的法处为所缘。所谓‘眼’,因其能看,即品尝色境而令其显现。所谓‘耳’,因其能听。所谓‘鼻’,因其能嗅。味是生命的相,故名为命;用以呼唤、招引该命的,便称为‘舌’。身是诸可厌、有漏法的生起之处,故称为‘身’。意了知所缘,识别所缘,故称为‘意’。当色变坏而呈现于心时,能显示其颜色的变化,所以称为‘色’。声由它的自缘所导引而令抵达,故称为‘声’。平等而触及,故名为‘触’。诸想于此聚合,故名为‘法’。显示巴利原文
384.Chasu ajjhattikabāhiresūti ‘‘chasu ajjhattikesu chasu bāhiresū’’ti ‘‘chasū’’ti padaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Kasmā panetāni ubhayāni chaḷeva vuttāni? Chaviññāṇakāyuppattidvārārammaṇavavatthānato. Cakkhuviññāṇavīthiyā pariyāpannassa hi viññāṇakāyassa cakkhāyatanameva uppattidvāraṃ, rūpāyatanameva ca ārammaṇaṃ, tathā itarāni itaresaṃ, chaṭṭhassa pana bhavaṅgamanasaṅkhāto manāyatanekadeso uppattidvāraṃ, asādhāraṇañca dhammāyatanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ. Cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti, vibhāveti cāti attho. Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ. Jīvitanimittatāya raso jīvitaṃ, taṃ jīvitaṃ avhāyatīti jivhā. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyo uppattidesoti kāyo. Munāti ārammaṇaṃ vijānātīti mano. Rūpayati vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti rūpaṃ. Sappati attano paccayehi harīyati sotaviññeyyabhāvaṃ gamīyatīti saddo. Gandhayati attano vatthuṃ sūcetīti gandho. Rasanti taṃ sattā assādentīti raso. Phusīyatīti phoṭṭhabbaṃ. Attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Sabbāni pana āyānaṃ tananādiatthena āyatanāni. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.510, 511, 512; visuddhi. ṭī. 2.510) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
「了知眼」(Cakkhuñcapajānātīti)这句经文(《长部》2.384;《中部》1.117)中,所谓「眼」指的是净色眼,既不是扶根尘眼,也不是天眼之类,因此才说「净色眼」(cakkhupasādaṃ)。那句「依四大种所造之净色而为眼」(《法集论》596),正是就此而言。经文中的「ca」字,则是用来将下文所要述说的义理一并收摄。所谓「以如实的作用和相为立足点」(yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena),即是以那不颠倒的自性所具足的作用(rasa)与相(lakkhaṇa)为立足点。也就是以「于色有牵引的作用」以及「能受色所撞击的业生净色之相」,或以「以想见为因缘、由业所生的净色之相」作为立足点。或者可以这样理解:「以如实的作用和相为立足点」,便是依于「如实的作用」,并依于「相」而作为立足点。而「如实的作用」应理解为不颠倒的自性。由于它能通过无误的穿透而令人品味、欢喜、满足,故称为「作用」(rasa),因此此处也就是「以自相为立足点」的意思。显示巴利原文
Cakkhuñcapajānātīti (dī. ni. 2.384; ma. ni. 1.117) ettha cakkhu nāma pasādacakkhu, na sasambhāracakkhu, nāpi dibbacakkhuādikanti āha cakkhupasādanti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ cakkhu catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo’’ti. (Dha. sa. 596) ca-saddo vakkhamānatthasamuccayattho. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasenāti aviparītassa attano rasassa ceva lakkhaṇassa ca vasena, rūpesu āviñchanakiccassa ceva rūpābhighātārahabhūtapasādalakkhaṇassa ca daṭṭhukāmatānidānakammasamuṭṭhānabhūtapasādalakkhaṇassa ca vasenāti attho. Atha vā yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasenāti yāthāvasarasavasena ceva lakkhaṇavasena ca, yāthāvasarasoti ca aviparītasabhāvo veditabbo. So hi rasīyati aviraddhapaṭivedhavasena assādīyati ramīyatīti ‘‘raso’’ti vuccati, tasmā salakkhaṇavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Lakkhaṇavasenāti aniccādisāmaññalakkhaṇavasena.
在「缘眼与诸色而生起眼识」(Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa)(《中部》1.204, 400; 《中部》3.421, 425, 426; 《相应部》2.43, 45; 2.4.60)这类经文中,为了阐明眼识生起的因,必须由诸色处聚合在一起方能成为因,而非各自分散、单独即可为因,所以才取用了复数形式的「与诸色」(rūpe ca)一词。顺着这种说法的惯例,尽管此处也说「了知色」(rūpe ca pajānāti),但实际上是依于色法的普遍性,将一切色总括起来,指涉的是作为外在、有四因生的色,因此用的反而是单数词。至于「以作用和相为立足点」,应当理解为:以「作为眼识之境这一作用」为立足点,以及以「能撞击眼根这一相」为立足点。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; ma. ni. 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43, 45; 2.4.60) samuditāniyeva rūpāyatanāni cakkhuviññāṇuppattihetu, na visuṃ visunti imassa atthassa jotanatthaṃ ‘‘rūpe cā’’ti puthuvacanaggahaṇaṃ, tāya eva ca desanāgatiyā kāmaṃ idhāpi ‘‘rūpe ca pajānātī’’ti vuttaṃ, rūpabhāvasāmaññena pana sabbaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā bahiddhā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpañcāti ekavacanavasena attho. Sarasalakkhaṇa vasenāti cakkhuviññāṇassa visayabhāvakiccassa vasena ceva cakkhupaṭihananalakkhaṇassa vasena cāti yojetabbaṃ.
「缘此二者」(Ubhayaṃ paṭiccā)的意思是:眼是作为亲依止缘等条件而成为缘的,色则是作为所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘等条件而成为缘的,依于这两者。虽然这是对经典的注释,但所谓非权宜的说法——即究竟说,其实是紧贴着阿毗达摩来谈的。因此,在以阿毗达摩的方式来显示种种结时,注释才说「欲贪结……乃至……无明结」(kāmarāga…pe… avijjāsaṃyojana)。其中,「于欲上的贪染」或「欲本身即是贪染」,故称为「欲贪」。它本身因为具有「束缚」的意义,所以是一种「结」。对于任何怀有此结的人,这个结便将他拴缚、捆绑在轮回之中,令他与苦紧密相连;或者将生命与另一生命等后续存在绑在一起;或者将业与果报绑在一起。因为能结合、能束缚,所以就叫作「结」。同样地,对于嗔结等其他结,也应当依于各自适切的义理来理解。至于这里所说的「以作用和相为立足点」,应当如此配合:以「令有情无法脱离轮回这一作用」为立足点,以及以「如前所述能束缚的相状」为立足点。显示巴利原文
Ubhayaṃ paṭiccāti cakkhuṃ upanissayapaccayavasena paccayabhūtaṃ, rūpe ārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayavasena paccayabhūte ca paṭicca. Kāmaṃ ayaṃ suttantasaṃvaṇṇanā, nippariyāyakathā nāma abhidhammasannissitā evāti abhidhammanayeneva saṃyojanāni dassento ‘‘kāmarāga…pe… avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti āha. Tattha kāmesu rāgo, kāmo ca so rāgo cāti vā kāmarāgo. So eva bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojanaṃ. Ayañhi yassa saṃvijjati, taṃ puggalaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ saṃyojeti bandhati iti dukkhena sattaṃ, bhavādike vā bhavantarādīhi, kammunā vā vipākaṃ saṃyojeti bandhatīti saṃyojanaṃ. Evaṃ paṭighasaṃyojaṃādīnampi yathārahamattho vattabbo. Sarasalakkhaṇavasenāti ettha pana sattassa vaṭṭato anissajjanasaṅkhātassa attano kiccassa ceva yathāvuttabandhanasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa ca vasenāti yojetabbaṃ.
所谓“执取欲味”,是为了遮止对有之味著与对邪见之味著。所说的“味著者”,是指正在享受、沉浸其中的人。所说的“欢喜者”,是指以带有喜悦的渴爱而欢喜的人。这两句说的都是作为强力欲贪之缘的欲贪生起。这个道理,对于其余诸结也同样适用。关于“在不可喜的所缘”这里,应把“āpāthagate”通过格位转换的方式,将“āpāthagata”一词引过来后再加以连接。而“这个所缘”指的是那种极其微细、极难分别的所缘。经文中的“恒常、坚固”只是一个举例,像“执取为将会断灭、将会毁坏”等各种情况,也都应当包含在内。基于第一种有身见随顺而起的疑,是怀疑“有没有众生?”;基于后一种随顺而起的疑,是怀疑“对众生来说是这样吗?”。这是由于随顺了我、我所等执取的疑。显示巴利原文
Bhavassādadiṭṭhissādanivattanatthaṃ kāmassādaggahaṇaṃ. Assādayatoti abhiramantassa. Abhinandatoti sappītikataṇhāvasena nandantassa. Padadvayenāpi balavato kāmarāgassa paccayabhūtā kāmarāguppatti vuttā. Esa nayo sesesupi. Aniṭṭhārammaṇeti ettha ‘‘āpāthagate’’ti vibhattivipariṇāmanavasena ‘‘āpāthagata’’nti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Etaṃ ārammaṇanti etaṃ evaṃsukhumaṃ evaṃdubbibhāgaṃ ārammaṇaṃ. ‘‘Niccaṃ dhuva’’nti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ. ‘‘Ucchijjissati vinassissatīti gaṇhato’’ti evamādīnampi saṅgaho icchitabbo. Paṭhamāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā anurodhavasena ‘‘satto nu kho’’ti, itarāya anurodhavasena ‘‘sattassa nu kho’’ti vicikicchato. Attattaniyādigāhānugatā hi vicikicchā diṭṭhiyā asati abhāvato. Bhavaṃ patthentassāti ‘‘īdise sampattibhave yasmā amhākaṃ idaṃ iṭṭhaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ sulabhaṃ jātaṃ, tasmā āyatimpi ediso, ito vā uttaritaro sampattibhavo bhaveyyā’’ti bhavaṃ nikāmentassa. Evarūpanti evarūpaṃ rūpaṃ. Taṃsadise hi tabbohāravasenevaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhavati hi taṃsadisesu tabbohāro yathā ‘‘sā eva tittirī, tāni eva osadhānī’’ti. Usūyatoti usūyaṃ issaṃ uppādayato. Aññassa maccharāyatoti aññena asādhāraṇabhāvakaraṇena macchariyaṃ karoto. Sabbeheva yathāvuttehi navahi saṃyojanehi.
“而那原因”指的是:能细分为净相、瞋相等那些可爱、不可爱等色所缘,以及针对这些所缘的如理作意——这些就是各个结生起的原因。而“未镇伏、未断除、得地而生起”的结,是就它而说它是“依未被断除的意义而生起的”。这里所说的现行,是指正在发生的现行,其实已经被“现行”一词所涵盖。所谓“由于那种原因”,是指由于称为止观修习的那种原因。因为能通过彼分断和镇伏断来断除烦恼的,正是这个原因。由于嫉妒与悭吝具有能令人堕入恶趣的性质,这里说它们是初道所断的。如果说它们是初道所断,那“由于断尽三结而成为入流者”这句经文又该如何领会呢?那是依经说的权宜方式来讲的。因为经典的教导是随顺听众根机的,而这里的注释则是依据阿毗达摩的理则来疏解的,所以这显示巴利原文
Tañca kāraṇanti subhanimittapaṭighanimittādivibhāgaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādirūpārammaṇañceva tajjāyonisomanasikārañcāti tassa tassa saṃyojanassa kāraṇaṃ. Avikkhambhitāsamūhatabhūmiladdhuppannaṃ taṃ sandhāya ‘‘appahīnaṭṭhena uppannassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vattamānuppannatā samudācāraggahaṇeneva gahitā. Yena kāraṇenāti yena vipassanāsamathabhāvanāsaṅkhātena kāraṇena . Tañhi tassa tadaṅgavasena ceva vikkhambhanavasena ca pahānakāraṇaṃ. Issāmacchariyānaṃ apāyagamanīyatāya paṭhamamaggavajjhatā vuttā. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.241) suttapadaṃ kathanti? Taṃ suttantapariyāyena vuttaṃ. Yathānulomasāsanā hi suttantadesanā, ayaṃ pana abhidhammanayena saṃvaṇṇanāti nāyaṃ dosoti. Oḷārikassāti thūlassa, yato abhiṇhasamuppattipariyuṭṭhānatibbatāva hoti. Aṇusahagatassāti vuttappakārābhāvena aṇubhāvaṃ sukhumabhāvaṃ gatassa. Uddhaccasaṃyojanassapettha anuppādo vuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbo yathāvuttasaṃyojanehi avinābhāvato. Ekatthatāya sotādīnaṃ sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānanā, tappaccayānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ uppādādipajānanā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbāti dassento ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti atidisati.
“对于自己的诸法”,是指对于自己相续中的内处诸法,或者对于自己相续中的内外二种法。依此解释,“以内处的把握”意思就是“以内处的把握作为入手处”。这样便能毫无遗漏地把握自他相续中的诸处。对于“对于他人的诸法”这句话,道理也是一样。关于“色处”,指的是具有十一种或十种半分类、以色为自性的处,应联系上文,理解为“应在色蕴中依前述理则抽取出来”。“在其余的蕴中”,指在受、想、行蕴中。通过“依前述理则”这句指示,点出了其中的差别:在色蕴中是以“食集”,在识蕴中是以“名色集”,在受想行蕴中则都是以“触集”。至于其他(无常、苦、无我等),则是一切处共通的。如同在蕴的章节一样,在处的章节中,巴利经文也没有导入出世显示巴利原文
Attano vā dhammesūti attano ajjhattikāyatanadhammesu, attano ubhayadhammesu vā. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ajjhattikāyatanapariggaṇhanenāti ajjhattikāyatanapariggaṇhanamukhenāti attho. Evañca anavasesato saparasantānesu āyatanānaṃ pariggaho siddho hoti. Parassavā dhammesūti etthāpi eseva nayo. Rūpāyatanassāti aḍḍhekādasappabhedassa rūpasabhāvassa āyatanassa rūpakkhandhe ‘‘vuttanayena nīharitabbo’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Sesakkhandhesūti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhesu. Vuttanayenāti iminā atidesena rūpakkhandhe ‘‘āhārasamudayā’’ti viññāṇakkhandhe ‘‘nāmarūpasamudayā’’ti sesakhandhesu ‘‘phassasamudayā’’ti imaṃ visesaṃ vibhāveti, itaraṃ pana sabbattha samānanti khandhapabbe viya āyatanapabbepi lokuttaranivattanaṃ pāḷiyaṃ gahitaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘lokuttaradhammā na gahetabbā’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
觉支篇章的注疏显示巴利原文
Bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā
385 “Bujjhanakasattassā”(能觉的有情):指从烦恼的沉睡中醒来的有情,或指证悟四圣谛的有情。“Aṅgesu”(支):指成因,或指组成部分。自从生灭智生起的那一刻开始,便称为“住于正觉之道”,因此说“从开始修观起,便是瑜伽行者,即是正觉”。所谓经中的教导,是一种权宜之说;而此处的念处教导是依世间道而展开的,因此称为“瑜伽行者即是正觉”,否则便会说“圣弟子”。显示巴利原文
385.Bujjhanakasattassāti kilesaniddāya paṭibujjhanakasattassa, ariyasaccānaṃ vā paṭivijjhanakasattassa. Aṅgesūti kāraṇesu, avayavesu vā . Udayavayañāṇuppattito paṭṭhāya sambodhipaṭipadāyaṃ ṭhito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘āraddhavipassakato paṭṭhāya yogāvacaroti sambodhī’’ti. Suttantadesanā nāma pariyāyakathā, ayañca satipaṭṭhānadesanā lokiyamaggavasena pavattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yogāvacaroti sambodhī’’ti, aññathā ‘‘ariyasāvako’’ti vadeyya.
“Satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā”(念觉支的近因)一词的意义,应依照“vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā”(疑的近因)那里所讲的方法来理解。它(近因)即是如理作意。此处的“tattha”(在那里)是就念而言,同时也是一个表示所应成就之处的处格。显示巴利原文
‘‘Satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā’’ti padassa attho ‘‘vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā’’ti ettha vuttanayena veditabbo. Tanti yonisomanasikāraṃ. Tatthāti satiyaṃ, nipphādetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ.
念与正知合称“念正知”。或者,增上念与在前进等行为中把握其有利义状态的正知,也是念正知。由于它在一切处皆能成就具念者的状态,故为念觉支的生起之因。正如断除违品法及修习随顺法是令未生善法生起之因,远离失念之人、亲近具念之人,并对此正确精勤,也是令念觉支生起之因——为表明此义,故说“念正知”等。有一位名为帝沙达多的长老,他曾在菩提座处手持金筹,向大众宣布:“我将用十八种语言中的哪一种来说法?”所说的无畏长老,即是指达达无畏长老。显示巴利原文
Sati ca sampajaññañca satisampajaññaṃ. Atha vā satippadhānaṃ abhikkantādisātthakabhāvapariggaṇhanañāṇaṃ satisampajaññaṃ. Taṃ sabbattha satokārībhāvāvahattā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hoti. Yathā paccanīkadhammappahānaṃ, anurūpadhammasevanā ca anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya hoti, evaṃ satirahitapuggalavivajjanā, satokārīpuggalasevanā, tattha ca yuttappayuttatā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hotīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘satisampajañña’’ntiādinā. Tissadattatthero nāma, yo bodhimaṇḍe suvaṇṇasalākaṃ gahetvā ‘‘aṭṭhārasasu bhāsāsu katarabhāsāya dhammaṃ kathemī’’ti parisaṃ pavāresi. Abhayattheroti dattābhayattheramāha.
「法之简择」(dhammavicayo)是对诸法的简择,或于诸法中的简择,它本身就是觉支,称为法之简择觉支。在「善与不善法」等词句中应解释的内容,与前面所说过的方式相同。此处,「多修如理作意」是指:为了如实了知善法等各自的自性、作用、相状等,通过如其自性地觉了而生起与智相应的心识。由于这颗心具有不颠倒的作意,故称「如理作意」;它倾向于彼,其转向也随之趋入。这种心的反复生起,便是「多修」。「为了更多」(bhiyyobhāvāya)是为了反复修习;「为了广大」(vepullāya)是为了达到广大的状态;「为了圆满」(pāripūriyā)是为了充分的培育。显示巴利原文
Dhammānaṃ, dhammesu vā vicayo dhammavicayo, so eva sambojjhaṅgo, tassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa. ‘‘Kusalākusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāroti kusalādīnaṃ taṃtaṃsabhāvasarasalakkhaṇaādikassa yāthāvato avabujjhanavasena uppanno ñāṇasampayuttacittuppādo. So hi aviparītamanasikāratāya ‘‘yonisomanasikāro’’ti vutto, tadābhogatāya āvajjanāpi taggatikā eva, tassa abhiṇhaṃ pavattanaṃ bahulīkāro. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunaṃ bhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Pāripūriyāti paribrūhanāya.
「遍问性」(paripucchakatā)是指深入探究后再请问的状态。亲近老师,遍学五部经典及其注疏,凡遇难解之处,便一一请问:「尊者,这是怎么回事?此有何义?」如此询问蕴、处等法义时,法之简择觉支便会生起。因此说「于蕴、界……乃至……多作性」。「令所依清净」:这里,心与心所生起的依处是身体,以及依附于身体的衣服等,这些都称为「所依」。使它们成为令心愉悦的状态,即是令它们清净。因此说「内与外」等。「烦恼增盛」指风等体内元素的紊乱增盛。「汗垢污染」指被汗液和称为尘垢的身体污垢所染污。句中的「ca」字还包括其他令身体和内心不适的东西。「坐卧具」:通过「vā」字应理解也包括钵等物品。当这些不清净时,或作为所缘境不清净时。为何说这些对修行者是所缘境呢?因为这是指那些间歇生起的心念,这些心念会导致心一境性不清净,而这些对象正是心与心所法的依止等缘。在作为依止等缘的对象中,「智亦」:pi字是合集的意思,因此不仅所依,当所依不清净时,智慧也会不清净。这有如当所依不清净时,依止……显示巴利原文
Paripucchakatāti pariyogāhetvā pucchakabhāvo. Ācariye payirupāsitvā pañcapi nikāye saha aṭṭhakathāya pariyogāhetvā yaṃ yaṃ tattha gaṇṭhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, taṃ taṃ ‘‘idaṃ bhante kathaṃ, imassa ko attho’’ti khandhāyatanādiatthaṃ pucchantassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Tenāha ‘‘khandhadhātu…pe… bahulatā’’ti. Vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇanti ettha cittacetasikānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato sarīraṃ, tappaṭibaddhāni cīvarāni ca ‘‘vatthūnī’’ti adhippetāni, tāni yathā cittassa sukhāvahāni honti, tathā karaṇaṃ tesaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhattikabāhirāna’’ntiādi. Ussannadosanti vātādiussannadosaṃ. Sedamalamakkhitanti sedena ceva jallikāsaṅkhātena sarīramalena ca makkhitaṃ. Ca-saddena aññampi sarīrassa, cittassa ca pīḷāvahaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Senāsanaṃ vāti vā-saddena pattādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Avisade sati, visayabhūte vā. Kathaṃ bhāvanamanuyuttassa tāni visayo? Antarantarā pavattanakacittuppādavasenevaṃ vuttaṃ. Te hi cittuppādā cittekaggatāya aparisuddhabhāvāya saṃvattanti. Cittacetasikesu nissayādipaccayabhūtesu. Ñāṇampīti pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, tena na kevalaṃ taṃ vatthuyeva, atha kho tasmiṃ aparisuddhe ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hotīti nissayāparisuddhiyā taṃnissitāparisuddhi viya visayassa aparisuddhatāya visayino aparisuddhiṃ dasseti.
「令平等」(samabhāvakaraṇa)是指使作用无不足、无过度。面对可敬信的所缘时,若胜解的作用过于敏锐,或因慧不够明晰,又或因精进等较为迟缓,信根便会强盛。因此说「其他诸根微弱」。「Tato」(由此):由于信根强盛,其他诸根微弱之故。「不让它落入懈怠,策励相应之法,给予支持力量」,这便是「策励」(paggaho),策励本身就是策励的作用。需依上下文理解「不能做」。「到达所缘并安住」,或者「不放弃」,这是「安住」(upaṭṭhāna)。「制止散乱」,或者「令相应法因此不散乱」,这是「不散乱」(avikkhepo)。如同眼见到颜色一般,能如实见到所缘境的自性,这便是「见的功用」。「不能做」是因为被强盛的信根所制伏。因为同时生起的诸法要执行各自的主导作用,唯有依靠俱生诸法彼此调和一致方能成就,别无他途。「Tasmā」(因此)是以前述道理为因,再作思惟。「Tam」(彼):指信根。「以观察法之自性」:对于那可……显示巴利原文
Samabhāvakaraṇanti kiccato anūnādhikabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Saddheyyavatthusmiṃ paccayavasena adhimokkhakiccassa paṭutarabhāvena, paññāya avisadatāya, vīriyādīnañca sithilatādinā saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘itarāni mandānī’’ti. Tatoti tasmā saddhindriyassa balavabhāvato , itaresañca mandattā. Kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sampayuttadhammānaṃ paggaṇhanaṃ anubalappadānaṃ paggaho, paggahova kiccaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, ‘‘kātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ, anissajjanaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ. Vikkhepapaṭikkhepo, yena vā sampayuttā avikkhittā honti, so avikkhepo. Rūpagataṃ viya cakkhunā yena yāthāvato visayasabhāvaṃ passati, taṃ dassanakiccaṃ. Kātuṃ na sakkoti balavatā saddhindriyena abhibhūtattā. Sahajātadhammesu hi indaṭṭhaṃ kārentānaṃ sahapavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ ekarasatāvaseneva atthasiddhi, na aññathā. Tasmāti vuttamevatthaṃ kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasati. Tanti saddhindriyaṃ . Dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇenāti yassa saddheyyassa vatthuno uḷāratādiguṇe adhimuccanassa sātisayappavattiyā saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tassa paccayapaccayuppannatādivibhāgato yāthāvato vīmaṃsanena. Evañhi evaṃdhammatānayena sabhāvasarasato pariggayhamāne savipphāro adhimokkho na hoti ‘‘ayaṃ imesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvo’’ti parijānanavasena paññābyāpārassa sātisayattā. Dhuriyadhammesu hi yathā saddhāya balavabhāve paññāya mandabhāvo hoti, evaṃ paññāya balavabhāve saddhāya mandabhāvo hotīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā, yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabba’’nti. Tathā amanasikārenāti yenākārena bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjantassa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tenākārena bhāvanāya ananuyuñjanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idha duvidhena saddhindriyassa balavabhāvo attano vā paccayavisesena kiccuttariyato, vīriyādīnaṃ vā mandakiccatāya. Tattha paṭhamavikappe hāpanavidhi dassito. Dutiyakappe pana yathā manasi karoto vīriyādīnaṃ mandakiccatāya saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena, vīriyādīnaṃ paṭukiccabhāvāvahena manasikārena saddhindriyaṃ tehi samarasaṃ karontena hāpetabbaṃ. Iminā nayena sesindriyesupi hāpanavidhi veditabbo.
婆迦梨长老事。这位尊者是一位信胜解者,已修加行,唯以瞻仰大师的色身为务而住。大师教导他说:“婆迦梨!你见此腐臭之身有何用?婆迦梨!若人见法,即见如来。”等语。之后,大师虽令其于业处用力,他却不从,在被驱摈后,便欲伤害自身,登上一处断崖。这时,大师为满其愿,放出光明,示现身相,并说此偈:显示巴利原文
Vakkalittheravatthūti. So hi āyasmā saddhādhimuttatāya katādhikāro satthu rūpakāyadassanappasuto eva hutvā viharanto satthārā ‘‘kiṃ te vakkali iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena, yo kho vakkali dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.87; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.208; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.380; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.130; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1007; theragā. aṭṭha. 2.vakkalittheragāthāvaṇṇanā) ovaditvā kammaṭṭhāne niyojitopi taṃ ananuyuñjanto paṇāmito attānaṃ vinipātetuṃ papātaṭṭhānaṃ abhiruhi, atha naṃ satthā yathānisinnova obhāsaṃ vissajjanena attānaṃ dassetvā –
充满欢悦的比丘,净信佛陀教法,
证得寂静之境,诸行止息的安乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pāmojjabahulo bhikkhu, pasanno buddhasāsane; Adhigacche padaṃ santaṃ, saṅkhārūpasamaṃ sukha’’nti. (dha. pa. 381) –
世尊说此偈已,即言:“来,瓦卡利!”彼便如以不死甘露灌顶,欢喜踊跃,遂起修观。然因其信力过强,未能契入修观之道。世尊知此,为令彼诸根得臻圆满,乃为净化其禅修业处。彼即依导师所示之教法,精勤策励修观,次第证得圣道,成就阿拉汉果。故言“瓦卡利长老之事,为此中例证”。“此中”者,即指信根增胜时,余根未能各尽其用之时节。显示巴利原文
Gāthaṃ vatvā ‘‘ehi vakkalī’’ti āha. So tena amateneva abhisitto haṭṭhatuṭṭho hutvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapesi. Saddhāya balavabhāvato vipassanāvīthiṃ na otarati, taṃ ñatvā bhagavā tassa indriyasamattapaṭipādanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā adāsi. So satthārā dinnanaye ṭhatvā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggappaṭipāṭiyā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassana’’nti. Etthāti saddhindriyassa adhimattabhāve sesindriyānaṃ sakiccākaraṇe.
“余事差别”者,指承事等作用之差别。“轻安等”之“等”字,应知包含定觉支与舍觉支。“应予减弱”者:如信根强盛,可藉由数数省察诸法实相而令减弱;同样,精进根过强,则应由修习轻安等而令减弱,因轻安等属定分之故。盖为护持定根,免其增上而陷懈怠,需修精进等;为护持精进根,免其增上而陷掉举,则必当单依修习轻安等以减弱之。故说“应由修习轻安等而令减弱”。“首那长老之事”者,乃身极细嫩首那长老之事。彼尊者从导师处受持禅修业处后,住于清凉林中。彼自思维:“我身极嫩,难安逸得乐,纵受辛劳,亦当尽沙门之本分。”于是决意唯行站立与经行,坚毅策励。纵足底生泡,亦忍痛不顾,精进坚固。然因过于勇悍,反不能证殊胜之成就。导师诣彼,以调琴喻教诫,开示平衡运用精进之修法,为彼净化。显示巴利原文
Itarakiccabhedanti upaṭṭhānādikiccavisesaṃ. Passaddhādīti ādi-saddena samādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Hāpetabbanti yathā saddhindriyassa balavabhāvo dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena hāyati, evaṃ vīriyindriyassa adhimattatā passaddhiādibhāvanāya hāyati samādhipakkhiyattā tassā. Tathā hi samādhindriyassa adhimattataṃ kosajjapātato rakkhantī vīriyādibhāvanā viya vīriyindriyassa adhimattataṃ uddhaccapātato rakkhantī ekaṃsato hāpeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘passaddhaādibhāvanāya hāpetabba’’nti. Soṇattherassa vatthūti sukumārasoṇattherassa vatthu. (Mahāva. 242; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.205) so hi āyasmā satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sītavane viharanto ‘‘mama sarīraṃ sukhumālaṃ, na ca sakkā sukheneva sukhaṃ adhigantuṃ, kilametvāpi samaṇadhammo kātabbo’’ti taṃ ṭhānacaṅkamameva adhiṭṭhāya padhānaṃ anuyuñjanto pādatalesu phoṭesu uṭṭhitesupi vedanaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā daḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ karonto accāraddhavīriyatāya visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi. Satthā tattha gantvā vīṇūpamovādena ovaditvā vīriyasamatāyojanavīthiṃ dassento kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā gijjhakūṭaṃ gato. Theropi satthārā dinnanayena vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā bhāvento vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘soṇattherassa vatthu dassetabba’’nti. Sesesupīti satisamādhipaññindriyesupi.
“平等”者,谓信与慧彼此无欠无余、均衡之状态,定与精进亦复如是。正如信与慧各为增上法,于作用上不相逾越,此乃特应追求者,以其二者平衡,安止方能成就;同理,定与精进分属懈怠与掉举之二边,因其力均势平、相互扶持,相应诸法便不落二边,安止乃能正确成就。“信力强而……”等语,乃以遮止反面之方式,阐明上述义理。其意为:若有具足深信而慧不明晰者,即成糊涂之信,非依审察确立之净信。如此,彼于不当信处生信,犹如外道弟子,易近狡诈之辈。反之,有慧强而信弱者,其慧驰逸,便作如是想:“纵无实舍财物,但心念布施,亦成布施功德”,是为似是而非之理由所欺。如此之心,为虚妄推论所惑者,不堪听受智者之言,亦不顺从教诫。故说“犹如由药所生之病,难以疗愈”。如所说,信与慧若不平等,非但无益,反生过患。显示巴利原文
Samatanti saddhāpaññānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anūnānadhikabhāvaṃ, tathā samādhivīriyānaṃ. Yathā hi saddhāpaññānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ dhuriyadhammabhūtānaṃ kiccato aññamaññaṃ nātivattanaṃ visesato icchitabbaṃ, yato nesaṃ samadhuratāya appanā sampajjati, evaṃ samādhivīriyānaṃ kosajjuddhaccapakkhikānaṃ samarasatāya sati aññamaññūpatthambhanato sampayuttadhammānaṃ antadvayapātābhāvena sammadeva appanā ijjhati. ‘‘Balavasaddho’’tiādi byatirekamukhena vuttasseva atthassa samatthanaṃ. Tassattho yo balavatiyā saddhāya samannāgato avisadañāṇo, so mudhappasanno hoti, na aveccappasanno. Tathā hi avatthusmiṃ pasīdati seyyathāpi titthiyasāvakā. Kerāṭikapakkhanti sāṭheyyapakkhaṃ bhajati. Saddhāhīnāya paññāya atidhāvanto ‘‘deyyavatthupariccāgena vinā cittuppādamattenapi dānamayaṃ puññaṃ hotī’’tiādīni parikappeti hetupatirūpakehi vañcito, evaṃbhūto ca sukkhatakkaviluttacitto paṇḍitānaṃ vacanaṃ nādiyati saññattiṃ na gacchati. Tenāha ‘‘bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hotī’’ti. Yathā cettha saddhāpaññānaṃ aññamaññaṃ visamabhāvo na atthāvaho, anatthāvahova, evaṃ, samādhivīriyānaṃ aññamaññaṃ visamabhāvo na atthāvaho, anatthāvahova, tathā na avikkhepāvaho, vikkhepāvahovāti. Kosajjaṃ abhibhavati, tena appanaṃ na pāpuṇātīti adhippāyo. Uddhaccaṃ abhibhavatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tadubhayanti saddhāpaññādvayaṃ, samādhivīriyadvayañca. Samaṃ kātabbanti samarasaṃ kātabbaṃ .
「止业处者」是指以止为禅修业处的人。「Evaṃ」的意思是说:在那样的时候,信稍微强一些是适合的。所谓「信的人」,并不是去怀疑「仅仅作意『地、地』,怎么能生起禅那呢」,而是确信「正自觉者所说的这个方法,必定会成就」,由此生起信心。所谓「深入信仰的人」,如同全然进入所缘一般,以胜解的方式,安立心、投入心。在这时,心一境性应当强而有力,因为对于禅那,定是最主要的。「两者」指定与慧。对于一个以止为业处的人,由于定是增上的,因此也需要慧成为增上,所以才说「也需要平衡」,意思是指达到均衡的状态。「安止」这里是指世间的安止。因为注释中说「也是有的」,语气中含有不确定。而出世间的安止,则必须这两者平衡才能达成。正如经文所说:「修习止与观,如同双轭并行。」显示巴利原文
Samādhikammikassāti samathakammaṭṭhānikassa. Evanti evaṃ sante, saddhāya thokaṃ balavabhāve satīti attho. Saddahantoti ‘‘pathavī pathavīti manasikaraṇamattena kathaṃ jhānuppattī’’ti acintetvā ‘‘addhā sammāsambuddhena vuttavidhi ijjhissatī’’ti saddahanto saddhaṃ janento. Okappentoti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya adhimuccanavasena avakappento pakkhandanto. Ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati samādhippadhānattā jhānassa. Ubhinnanti samādhipaññānaṃ. Samādhikammikassa samādhino adhimattatāya paññāya adhimattatāpi icchitabbāti āha ‘‘samatāyapī’’ti, samabhāvenāpīti attho. Appanāti lokiyappanā. Tathā hi ‘‘hotiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati. Lokuttarappanā pana tesaṃ samabhāveneva icchitā. Yathāha ‘‘samathavipassanaṃ yuganandhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (a. ni. 4.170; paṭi. ma. 2.5).
倘若特别期望信与慧、定与精进这两对各自平衡,那么念又该如何呢?因此说到:「然而,念在任何时候都应强而有力。」「任何时候」是指在与昏沉或掉举相应的五根之中。当它把握住掉举那一方面的部分时,便提到「信、精进、慧」。否则的话,喜也应该被涵盖进来。正如经文只说「与懈怠相应的定」,而没有提及「轻安、定和舍」一样。在此处,「念」就如同一位统理一切皇家事务的全能大臣。正因为念在任何时候都是必要的,注释才这么说。之所以被称为「一切处所需」,是因为它在任何情况下都适用:不论心昏沉时,还是掉举时,它都是必要的;或者说,一切于昏沉或掉举时应修习的觉支,都因有它才能存在,所以念即是「一切处所需」。此处所说的「心」,是指善心。因为念是善心的依止与归宿,能使未获得的获得,未证得的证得。因此说到「它的现起是守护」等等。显示巴利原文
Yadi visesato saddhāpaññānaṃ, samādhivīriyānañca samatāva icchitā, kathaṃ satīti āha ‘‘sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭatī’’ti. Sabbatthāti līnuddhaccapakkhikesu pañcasu indriyesu. Uddhaccapakkhikekadese gaṇhanto ‘‘saddhāvīriyapaññāna’’nti āha. Aññathā pīti ca gahetabbā siyā. Tathā hi ‘‘kosajjapakkhikena samādhinā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘passaddhisamādhiupekkhāhī’’ti. Sāti sati. Sabbesu rājakammesu niyutto sabbakammiko. Tenāti tena sabbattha icchitabbaṭṭhena kāraṇena. Āha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Sabbattha niyuttā sabbatthikā sabbattha līne, uddhate ca citte icchitabbattā, sabbe vā līne, uddhate ca citte bhāvetabbā bojjhaṅgā atthikā etāyāti sabbatthikā. Cittanti kusalaṃ cittaṃ. Tassa hi sati paṭisaraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya. Tenāha ‘‘ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā’’tiādi.
「于诸蕴等分类法中智慧未能深入者」,是指虽依教理博学多闻,但在诸蕴、诸处等法上,智慧尚未能稳固安立的人。因为亲近多闻者,能带来闻所成慧。即使是初修观的行者,也由于安立于修所成慧,在严格意义上确实可称为有智慧的人,因此说到「亲近那些具足能把握诸行共相、具有生灭慧的人」。由于所要了知的法本性甚深,因此用来决断它的智慧也显得甚深,基于这层理解,便说「在甚深的诸蕴等处,所生起的甚深智慧」。因为那样甚深之所知,必须由那样的智慧才能行于其境,所以称为甚深智慧之行境;又或者,那智慧就在这甚深法中,以分类的方式转起,这本身就是一种甚深智慧的行境,对它进行省察,因此说「对甚深智慧的分类进行省察」。恰如只有阿拉汉才称为念的圆满者,同样地,也只有阿拉汉才称为慧的圆满者,因此说「通过阿拉汉道,修行达到圆满」。对于精进等其他诸根,道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
Khandhādibhede anogāḷhapaññānanti pariyattibāhusaccavasenapi khandhāyatanādīsu appatiṭṭhitabuddhīnaṃ. Bahussutasevanā hi sutamayañāṇāvahā. Taruṇavipassanāsamaṅgīpi bhāvanāmayañāṇe ṭhitattā ekaṃsato paññavā eva nāma hotīti āha ‘‘samapaññāsa lakkhaṇapariggāhikāya udayabbayapaññāya samannāgatapuggalasevanā’’ti. Ñeyyadhammassa gambhīrabhāvavasena tapparicchedakañāṇassa gambhīrabhāvaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya gambhīrapaññāyā’’ti. Tañhi ñeyyaṃ tādisāya paññāya caritabbato gambhīrañāṇacariyaṃ, tassā vā paññāya tattha pabhedato pavatti gambhīrañāṇacariyā, tassā paccavekkhaṇāti āha ‘‘gambhīrapaññāya pabhedapaccavekkhaṇā’’ti. Yathā sativepullappatto nāma arahā eva, evaṃ paññāvepullappattotipi so evāti āha ‘‘arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotī’’ti. Vīriyādīsupi eseva nayo.
“将炽热铁橛放在手中”等(《中部》3.250, 267;《增支部》3.36)所说的五种束缚业,对于投生地狱的众生,大都一开始就令他们承受,因此《天使经》等最初便讲述了这些,故说“从五种束缚业开始”。“驾车等时”的“等”字,也包括了遭受其他人及畜生逼恼的时候。“一次佛陀间隔”是就那些在饿鬼中辗转轮回的众生而说的;又或者有些饿鬼如同某些畜生那样长寿,所以如此说。正如所说:“龙王迦罗,值遇四佛出世而住,还将亲见弥勒世尊”,这是说他有长达一劫的寿命。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattaṃ ayokhilaṃ hatthe gamentī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.250, 267; a. ni. 3.36) vuttapañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇā niraye nibbattasattassa yebhuyyena sabbapaṭhamaṃ karontīti, devadūtasuttādīsu tassa ādito vuttattā ca āha ‘‘pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇato paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Sakaṭavahanādikāleti ādi-saddena tadaññamanussehi, tiracchānehi ca vibādhiyamānakālaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Ekaṃ buddhantara’’nti idaṃ aparāparaṃ petesu eva uppajjanakasattavasena vuttaṃ, ekaccānaṃ vā petānaṃ ekaccatiracchānānaṃ viya tathā dīghāyukatāpi siyāti tathā vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘kālo nāgarājā catunnaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāvaṃ labhitvā ṭhito metteyyassapi bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṃ labhissatī’’ti vadanti, yaṃ tassa kappāyukatā vuttā.
“见功德者”:指习惯地看到精进的功德,认为“一切世间及出世间的殊胜成就,全靠精进”的人。“行路”:连同前行部分的趣向涅槃之道,也就是与观相应的圣道次第,或者七清净的相续。因为这是比丘为出离轮回所应行的道路,故称为行路。“多令身坚强者”:指总是不懈地努力,使身体变得强壮的人。“团食”:指信施的食物。通过让施主知道,自己所修的布施、正确的修行能获得大果报,以此来回报所乞得的食物,就叫作恭敬团食。显示巴利原文
Ānisaṃsadassāvinoti ‘‘vīriyāyatto eva sabbo lokuttaro, lokiyo ca visesādhigamo’’ti evaṃ vīriye ānisaṃsadassanasīlassa. Gamanavīthinti sapubbabhāgaṃ nibbānagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ, saha vipassanāya ariyamaggapaṭipāṭi , sattavisuddhiparamparā vā. Sā hi bhikkhuno vaṭṭaniyyānāya gantabbā paṭipadāti katvā gamanavīthi nāma. Kāyadaḷhībahuloti yathā tathā kāyassa daḷhīkammappasuto. Piṇḍanti raṭṭhapiṇḍaṃ. Paccayadāyakānaṃ attani kārassa attano sammāpaṭipattiyā mahapphalabhāvassa karaṇena piṇḍassa bhikkhāya paṭipūjanā piṇḍāpacāyanaṃ.
“取出”:指从钵袋中取出食物。“听了那个声音后”:他站在自己居住的叶屋门口,凭借五神通中的天耳通,听到了那位近事女的话。人成就、天成就、涅槃成就,这是三种成就。“你将能给予”:长老自问道:“以你所积累的布施所成、承事所成的福业,由于你成就了殊胜福田的状态,你能连续不断地给予人、天的成就,最终还能给予涅槃成就吗?”“面露微笑”:在省察结束时,因生起欢悦而面露微笑,心想:“我已毫不费力地超越轮回之苦了。”显示巴利原文
Nīharantoti pattathavikato nīharanto. Taṃ saddaṃ sutvāti taṃ upāsikāya vacanaṃ attano vasanapaṇṇasāladvāre ṭhitova pañcābhiññatāya dibbasotena sutvā. Manussasampatti, dibbasampatti, nibbānasampattīti imā tisso sampattiyo. Dātuṃ sakkhissasīti ‘‘tayi katena dānamayena, veyyāvaccamayena ca puññakammena khettavisesabhāvūpagamanena aparāparaṃ devamanussasampattiyo, ante nibbānasampattiñca dātuṃ sakkhissasī’’ti thero attānaṃ pucchati. Sitaṃ karonto vāti ‘‘akiccheneva mayā vaṭṭadukkhaṃ samatikkanta’’nti paccavekkhaṇāvasāne sañjātapāmojjavasena sitaṃ karonto eva.
「邪行者」:指因违犯种姓法与家族法等而成为不如理行之人。正如那不如理行的儿子,由于如此不如理行,便脱离家族传承而成为外人,不能从父亲那里获得遗产的份额;同样地,懈怠者以其懈怠而成为不如理行者,不能从导师那里获得应得的圣财遗产。唯有精进者,因如理而行,方能获得。「精进觉支生起」是连结语,于一切处皆同。显示巴利原文
Vippaṭipannanti jātidhammakuladhammādilaṅghanena asammāpaṭipannaṃ. Evaṃ yathā asammāpaṭipanno putto tāya eva asammāpaṭipattiyā kulasantānato bāhiro hutvā pitu santikā dāyajjassa na bhāgī, evaṃ. Kusītopi tena kusītabhāvena asammāpaṭipanno satthu santikā laddhabbaariyadhanadāyajjassa na bhāgī. Āraddhavīriyova labhati sammāpaṭipajjanato. Uppajjati vīriyasambojjhaṅgoti yojanā, evaṃ sabbattha.
「大」:指以戒等功德而成为伟大、广博、不共他人的。为了显示佛陀功德的广大——通过震动十千世界而昭显于世间,故举「satthuno hī」(导师的)等语。显示巴利原文
Mahāti sīlādīhi guṇehi mahanto vipulo anaññasādhāraṇo. Taṃ panassa guṇamahattaṃ dasasahassilokadhātukampanena loke pākaṭanti dassento ‘‘satthuno hī’’tiādimāha.
因为于世尊教法中出家的人,借着出家而确立了释迦子的身份;为了显示其佛子的身份,故说「asambhinnāyā」(不混杂的)等语。显示巴利原文
Yasmā satthusāsane pabbajitassa pabbajjūpagamena sakyaputtassabhāvo sampajāyati, tasmā buddhaputtabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘asambhinnāyā’’tiādimāha.
那些懈怠之人,连修习之名都全然不知,大多注重强健身躯,饱食之后便耽著于躺卧的舒适等,谈论畜生之论——远远避开他们,即是「远离懈怠者」。而「白天以经行、禅坐……」,那些着手修习、发起精进的人,是坚固努力者,时常亲近他们,即是「亲近发起精进者」。因此说到「填饱肚子之后」等。然而在《清净道论》中,并未采用「省察出生的伟大性」与「省察同梵行者的伟大性」这两项,而是采用了「驱除昏沉睡眠」与「省察正勤」。在那里,由于见到了利益,实际上已包含了省察正勤,因为它表明了世间与出世间的一切殊胜成就皆依赖于精进。驱除昏沉睡眠则是由于倾向于它而被采用;对于致力于生起精进之人,驱除昏沉睡眠是自然成就的。于此,精进觉支的生起因应被视作:由驱除昏沉睡眠、远离懈怠者、亲近发起精进者、倾向于彼、驱除对立面、具足因缘等方面,并以激发的方式,如省察恶趣的怖畏等。显示巴利原文
Alasānaṃ bhāvanāya nāmamattampi ajānantānaṃ kāyadaḷhībahulānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhādianuyuñjanakānaṃ tiracchānakathikānaṃ puggalānaṃ dūrato vajjanā kusītapuggalaparivajjanā. ‘‘Divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.423; 3.65; saṃ. ni. 4.120; mahāni. 161) bhāvanāraddhavasena āraddhavīriyānaṃ daḷhaparakkamānaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanā āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanā. Tenāha ‘‘kucchiṃ pūretvā’’tiādi. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.64) pana jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇā, sabrahmacārīmahattapaccavekkhaṇāti idaṃ dvayaṃ na gahitaṃ, thinamiddhavinodanatā, sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatāti idaṃ dvayaṃ gahitaṃ. Tattha ānisaṃsadassāvitāya eva sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇā gahitā hoti lokiyalokuttaravisesādhigamassa vīriyāyattatādassanabhāvato. Thinamiddhavinodanaṃ tadadhimuttatāya eva gahitaṃ hoti, vīriyuppādane yuttappayuttassa thinamiddhavinodanaṃ atthasiddhameva. Tattha thinamiddhavinodanakusītapuggalaparivajjanaāraddhavīriyapuggalasevana- tadadhimuttatāpaṭipakkhavidhamanapaccayūpasaṃhāravasena, apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇādayo samuttejanavasena vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādakā daṭṭhabbā.
先前已生起的喜,是随后生起之喜的殊胜因缘——同类因,故说「喜本身即是喜觉支的因法」;又因此喜多次转起,依其多数而用复数表述。如其生起的方式,如是实践即是它的生起作意。显示巴利原文
Purimuppannā pīti parato uppajjanakapītiyā visesakāraṇasabhāgahetubhāvato ‘‘pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā’’ti vuttā, tassā pana bahuso pavattiyā puthuttaṃ upādāya bahuvacananiddeso. Yathā sā uppajjati, evaṃ paṭipatti tassā uppādakamanasikāro.
佛随念等所应说的内容,应依《清净道论》所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Buddhānussatī’’tiādīsu vattabbaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.123) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
由于佛随念以近行定为终点,所以说“至近行”。“充遍全身”:即以喜所生的殊胜色,充遍整个身体。在忆念法的功德时,喜觉支同样充遍全身而至近行——应将这一道理也连接到其余随念中。在省察《净信经》时也是如此,因为那也是以解脱处为因,导向于此。即使在诸行还有余留的止息中,也如同完全止息一般,智慧那样转起;如此作意的修习能镇伏烦恼,带来近行定,并具足那样的喜与喜悦,从而成为喜觉支生起的条件。所以说:“乃至省察等至时也是如此。”那里有“被镇伏的烦恼”这一文句。那些烦恼确实不再活动。iti一词表示原因:因为烦恼不活动,所以省察它们的不活动——应如此连接。确实,单靠省察烦恼不可能生起觉支。在那些应当生起净信之处,由于没有净信的喜,心变得像糠秕一样僵硬粗涩;这种状态通过不恭敬的行为表现出来,因此说“以不恭敬的造作而显露的粗涩状态”。显示巴利原文
Buddhānussatiyā upacārasamādhiniṭṭhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘yāva upacārā’’ti. Sakalasarīraṃ pharamānoti pītisamuṭṭhānehi paṇītarūpehi sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno. Dhammaguṇe anussarantassāpi yāva upacārā sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjatīti yojanā, evaṃ sesaanussatīsu. Pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇāyañca yojetabbaṃ tassāpi vimuttāyatanabhāvena taggatikattā. Saṅkhārānaṃ sappadesavūpasamepi nippadesavūpasame viya tathā paññāya pavattito bhāvanāmanasikāro kilesavikkhambhanasamattho hutvā upacārasamādhiṃ āvahanto tathārūpapītisomanassasamannāgato pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hotīti āha ‘‘samāpattiyā…pe… paccavekkhantassāpī’’ti. Tattha ‘‘vikkhambhitā kilesā’’ti pāṭho. Te hi na samudācarantīti. Iti-saddo kāraṇattho, yasmā na samudācaranti, tasmā taṃ nesaṃ asamudācāraṃ paccavekkhantassāti yojanā . Na hi kilese paccavekkhantassa bojjhaṅguppatti yuttā. Pasādanīyesu ṭhānesu pasādasinehābhāvena thūsasamahadayatā lūkhatā, sā tattha ādaragāravākaraṇena viññāyatīti āha ‘‘asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsūcitalūkhabhāve’’ti.
以身心不安的止息为特征的轻安,即是这里所说的觉支——轻安觉支。轻安觉支便是这样生起的——应如此连接来理解。显示巴利原文
Kāyacittadarathavūpasamalakkhaṇā passaddhi eva yathāvuttabodhiaṅgabhūto passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, tassa passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa evaṃ uppādo hotīti yojanā.
“受用殊胜食物”:指受用殊胜、适宜的食物。通过受用适宜时节与威仪所带来的安乐,应理解为摄取了适宜的时节与威仪。因为这三种若以适宜的方式受用,便能使身体适合作业,进而令心适合作业,成为两种轻安的因。于众生中,无因的苦与乐,这是第一边;以大自在天等不平等因为因,这是第二边。不偏向这两边,而随各各自作的业而有,这就是中道。行于中道者,称为“中道实行者”,其状态即是“中道实行性”。这种实行能舍弃身的躁动状态,成为身轻安的因,带来两种轻安。由此也说明:远离身的躁动者、亲近身轻安者,能引生轻安。显示巴利原文
Paṇītabhojanasevanatāti paṇītasappāyabhojanaseva natā . Utuiriyāpathasukhaggahaṇena sappāyautuiriyāpathaggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tañhi tividhampi sappāyaṃ seviyamānaṃ kāyassa kallatāpādanavasena cittassa kallataṃ āvahantaṃ duvidhāyapi passaddhiyā kāraṇaṃ hoti. Ahetukaṃ sattesu labbhamānaṃ sukhadukkhanti ayameko anto, issarādivisamahetukanti pana ayaṃ dutiyo. Ete ubho ante anupagamma yathāsakaṃ kammunā hotīti ayaṃ majjhimā paṭipatti. Majjhatto payogo yassa so majjhattapayogo, tassa bhāvo majjhattapayogatā. Ayañhi pahāya sāraddhakāyataṃ passaddhakāyatāya kāraṇaṃ hontī passaddhidvayaṃ āvahati, eteneva sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanapassaddhakāyapuggalasevanānaṃ tadāvahanatā saṃvaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
当依“如已安止之相”来观察时,先前所生的止本身就是止的相。「散乱」:因为心在各种所缘上游荡,执取种种端绪,故称“散乱”,也就是掉散。散乱以不稳定性为作用,以纷驰为现起。由于缺乏心一境性,与散乱相对的便是「不散乱」,即定。那定本身就是相,如前所述。因此说:“以不散乱的意义,也就是不散乱的相。”显示巴利原文
Yathāsamāhitākārasallakkhaṇavasena gayhamāno purimuppanno samatho eva samathanimittaṃ. Nānārammaṇe paribbhamanena vividhaṃ aggaṃ etassāti byaggo, vikkhepo. Tathā hi so anavaṭṭhānaraso, bhantatāpaccupaṭṭhāno ca vutto, ekaggatābhāvato byaggapaṭipakkhoti abyaggo, samādhi. So eva nimittanti pubbe viya vattabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘avikkhepaṭṭhena ca abyagganimitta’’nti.
「事物清净」与「令根圆满成就」被说为能带来慧;同时,它们也能带来定。正是由于它们是通过带来定而成为带来慧的,所以这样说:“应当理解事物清净……乃至……。”显示巴利原文
Vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā ca paññāvahā vuttā, samādhānāvahāpi tā honti samādhānāvahabhāveneva paññāvahabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthuvisada…pe… veditabbā’’ti.
「相善巧」:由于作因的修习与善巧不可分离,而守护善巧又以它为根本,因此只说:“所谓相善巧,就是对业处相的摄取善巧。”而这里所说的“业处相”,应看作仅是举例而已。因为对于任何能生起禅那的相——包括不净相——摄取善巧,都同样叫作相善巧。
「由于过度松懈的精进等」:这里的“等”字包含了智慧运用的疲弱与喜悦的不足。「策励彼心」:对于陷入沉滞的心,通过令择法觉支等诸法生起,将它从懈怠的状态中提振出来。对此,世尊曾这样说——显示巴利原文
Karaṇabhāvanākosallānaṃ avinābhāvato, rakkhanakosallassa ca taṃmūlakattā ‘‘nimittakusalatā nāma kasiṇanimittassa uggahaṇakusalatā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Kasiṇanimittassāti ca nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Asubhanimittassāpi hi yassa kassaci jhānuppattinimittassa uggahaṇakosallaṃ nimittakusalatā evāti. Atisithilavīriyatādīhīti ādi-saddena paññāpayogamandataṃ , pamodavekallañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tassa paggaṇhananti tassa līnassa cittassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādisamuṭṭhāpanena layāpattito samuddharaṇaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
诸比丘,当心昏沉时,正是修习法抉择觉支的时机,是修习精进觉支的时机,也是修习喜觉支的时机。何以故?诸比丘,昏沉之心,以这些法即能易于策励。诸比丘,譬如有人欲点燃一堆小火,他将干草置入,将干牛粪置入,将干薪置入,并以口吹气,且不撒尘土——诸比丘,此人能否点燃这堆小火?显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ taṃ etehi dhammehi susamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjālitukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni gomayāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, mukhavātañca dadeyya, na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjālitunti. Evaṃ bhante’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).
于此应知,法抉择觉支等各自依其食而修习生起,前文紧接着已作阐明。“以精勤策励等”:此“等”字含摄智慧运用的强盛,以及愉悦的广大。“抑制彼心”:即对于掉举之心,通过令定觉支等生起,将其从掉举状态中抑制下来。对此,世尊也曾如是说——显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanāsamuṭṭhāpanāti veditabbā, sā anantaraṃ vibhāvitā eva. Āraddhavīriyatādīhīti ādi-saddena paññāpayogabalavataṃ, pamodubbilāvanañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tassa niggaṇhananti tassa uddhatassa cittassa samādhisambojjhaṅgādisamuṭṭhāpanena uddhatāpattito nisedhanaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
诸比丘,当心掉举时,正是修习轻安觉支的时机,是修习定觉支的时机,也是修习舍觉支的时机。何以故?诸比丘,掉举之心,以这些法即能易于平静。诸比丘,譬如有人欲熄灭一堆大火,他将湿草投入,将湿牛粪投入,将湿薪投入,并撒以尘土——诸比丘,此人能否熄灭那堆大火?显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ taṃ etehi dhammehi suvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni…pe… paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti. Evaṃ bhante’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).
于此也当知,轻安觉支等诸觉支的修习生起,是依各自相应的资粮而成立的。其中,轻安觉支的修习已说。定觉支紧接着会说明。所说的「由于智慧运用的疲弱」,是指智慧所起的作用力量薄弱。就如布施以无贪为主导,持戒以无嗔为主导,同样,修习以无痴为主导。当修习中智慧不强劲时,修习便无法辗转引生殊胜的进步;犹如未妥善调理的食物,不能令修行者的心生起喜爱,因此那修习便成了「无滋味」;同样,修习未能正确进入行道,便不能获得寂静之乐,因此心也变得「无滋味」。所以说:「智慧运用疲弱……心便无滋味。」策发他的悚惧感,同时激发其净信,这便是对治之法。为了说明这一点,才说出「八种悚惧事」等内容。其中,生、老、病、死,无论在善趣还是恶趣都会发生;是故,应将与此有别、以五种束缚、饥渴、互相逼迫等为因的恶趣之苦,视为另一种悚惧事。而这一切,都是以各类众生现前这一生为所依而执取的;至于过去与未来,则单独执取为轮回根本之苦。然而,对于那些依食物而活、且依靠勤劳成果而活的众生,他们那种与别人不共的谋……显示巴利原文
Etthāpi yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena passaddhisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanāsamuṭṭhāpanāti veditabbā, tattha passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanā vuttā eva. Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa anantaraṃ vakkhati. Paññāpayogamandatāyāti paññābyāpārassa appabhāvena. Yathā hi dānaṃ alobhapadhānaṃ, sīlaṃ adosapadhānaṃ, evaṃ bhāvanā amohapadhānā. Tattha yadā paññā na balavatī hoti, tadā bhāvanā pubbenāparaṃ visesāvahā na hoti, anabhisaṅkhato viya āhāro purisassa yogino cittassa abhiruciṃ na janeti, tena taṃ nirassādaṃ hoti, tathā bhāvanāya sammadeva avīthipaṭipattiyā upasamasukhaṃ na vindati, tenāpi cittaṃ nirassādaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpayoga…pe… nirassādaṃ hotī’’ti. Tassa saṃveguppādanaṃ, pasāduppādanañca tikicchananti taṃ dassento ‘‘aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūnī’’tiādimāha. Tattha jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni yathārahaṃ sugatiyaṃ, duggatiyañca hontīti tadaññameva pañcavidhabandhanādikhuppipāsādi aññamaññaṃ vibādhanādihetukaṃ apāyadukkhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tayidaṃ sabbaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ paccuppannabhavanissitaṃ gahitanti atīte anāgate ca kāle vaṭṭamūlakadukkhāni visuṃ gahitāni. Ye pana sattā āhārūpajīvino, tattha ca uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino, tesaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ jīvikādukkhaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ saṃvegavatthu gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye sampahaṃsanāti ayaṃ bhāvanācittassa sampahaṃsitabbasamaye vuttanayena saṃvegajananavasena ceva pasāduppādanavasena ca sammadeva pahaṃsanā, saṃvegajananapubbakapasāduppādanena tosanāti attho.
「依于正行」:即既脱离沉滞与掉举,又依循寂止行道,正确、均衡、如实地证得修习之行。「不沉滞」等词:因懈怠一方之法不过分,故称「不沉滞」;因掉举一方之法不过分,故称「不掉举」;由智慧运用的成就及获得寂静之乐,故称「不无滋味」。正因如此,心于所缘上完全转入,进入寂止行道。于此中,由于不沉滞,于策励方面便不再用力;由于不掉举,于抑制方面便不再用力;由于不无滋味,于令欢喜方面便不再用力。因为不沉滞、不掉举,所以能于所缘完全转入;因为不无滋味,所以能入于寂止行道。或者也可这样理解:因完全转入,故不沉滞、不掉举;因入于寂止行道,故不无滋味。「此称为适时之舍置」:指在应舍置之时,修习之心于策励、抑制、令欢喜方面的不作功用性——即克服对立之后的一种观察,称为舍置。由于能镇伏对立,并能成为观的近因安住处,即使是近行定,也因完成了定的作用,对于行者的入定状态有所助成;因此,在功能等同的意义上说:「无论是近行还是安止」。显示巴利原文
Sammāpaṭipattiṃ āgammāti līnuddhaccavirahena, samathavīthipaṭipattiyā ca sammā avisamaṃ sammadeva bhāvanāpaṭipattiṃ āgamma. ‘‘Alīna’’ntiādīsu kosajjapakkhikānaṃ dhammānaṃ anadhimattatāya alīnaṃ, uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ anadhimattatāya anuddhataṃ, paññāpayogasampattiyā, upasamasukhādhigamena ca anirassādaṃ, tato eva ārammaṇe samappavattaṃsamathavīthipaṭipannaṃ. Tattha alīnatāya paggahe, anuddhatatāya niggahe, anirassādatāya sampahaṃsane na byāpāraṃ āpajjati. Alīnānuddhatatā hi ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ, anirassādatāya samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ, samappavattiyā vā alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ. Samathavīthipaṭipattiyā anirassādanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye ajjhupekkhanatāti ayaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbasamaye bhāvanācittassa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭatāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipakkhaṃ abhibhuyya pekkhanā vuccati. Paṭipakkhavikkhambhanato, vipassanāya adhiṭṭhānabhāvūpagamanato ca upacārajjhānampi samādhāna kiccanipphattiyā puggalassa samāhitabhāvasādhanaṃ evāti tattha samadhurabhāvenāha ‘‘upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā’’ti.
「堪为舍觉支处之法」:此处应说的内容,可依前文所述之理了知。以舍弃随顺与违逆而成就的中舍性,是舍觉支的因,因为有此中舍时它便成就,无此时则不成就。而这种中舍性依所缘境分为二种,故说「有情中舍性、行中舍性」。于彼二者中,违逆的一面已由轻安觉支的修习而远离,为显示仅舍弃随顺一面的方法,故说「有情中舍性」等。因此说「远离对有情及诸行爱着之人」。对舍而言,贪是它特别的对立面。正如所说:「舍是贪行者的清净道」(《清净道论》第一·267)。「以两种方式」:即「业之所属」的审察与「自我空寂」的审察,以此二因。「仅以两种」:这是一个限定,用以显示数量上等同。此处仅是数量相同,并非所审察对象的方方面面都完全等同。无有拥有者,即确定无我。倘若真有「我」,那么以「我所有」的状态,便会有衣,或其他任何属于「我所」之物;但那样的东西根本不存在,这便是它的意旨。「不能持久的」:即不能耐受长途,不能久住,短暂、无常的意思。「暂时的」是其同义词。显示巴利原文
Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammāti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ. Anurodhavirodhavippahānavasena majjhattabhāvo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa kāraṇaṃ tasmiṃ sati sijjhanato, asati ca asijjhanato. So ca majjhattabhāvo visayavasena duvidhoti āha ‘‘sattamajjhattatā saṅkhāramajjhattatā’’ti. Tadubhaye ca virujjhanaṃ passaddhisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāya eva dūrīkatanti anurujjhanasseva pahānavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sattamajjhattatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā’’ti. Upekkhāya hi visesato rāgo paṭipakkho. Tathā cāha ‘‘upekkhā rāgabahulassa visuddhimaggo’’ti (visuddhi. 1.267). Dvīhākārehīti kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇaṃ, attasuññatāpaccavekkhaṇanti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi. Dvīhevāti avadhāraṇaṃ saṅkhyāsamānatādassanatthaṃ. Saṅkhyā evettha samānā, na saṅkhyeyyaṃ sabbathā samānanti. Assāmikabhāvo anattaniyatā. Sati hi attani tassa kiñcanabhāvena cīvaraṃ, aññaṃ vā kiñci attaniyaṃ nāma siyā, so pana koci natthevāti adhippāyo. Anaddhaniyanti na addhānakkhamaṃ na ciraṭṭhāyi, ittaraṃ aniccanti attho. Tāvakālikanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.
“执为我所”:即造作我所执,以渴爱执取“这是我的”而安住。显示巴利原文
Mamāyatīti mamattaṃ karoti ‘‘mamā’’ti taṇhāya pariggayha tiṭṭhati.
“执为我所者”:即把慢视为财物。显示巴利原文
Mamāyantāti mānaṃ dabbaṃ karontā.
这一念处教示是依前行道而说,故是针对前行觉支而言:“摄持觉支的念即是苦谛。”其余依前所说,极易了知。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ satipaṭṭhānadesanā pubbabhāgamaggavasena desitāti pubbabhāgiyabojjhaṅge sandhāyāha ‘‘bojjhaṅgapariggāhikā sati dukkhasacca’’nti. Sesaṃ vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva.
四谛品的注释显示巴利原文
Catusaccapabbavaṇṇanā
386 “如实之相”:即如其实相而无颠倒。从逼迫方面说,凡任何特性皆为如实之相,亦即被破坏、坚硬等特性便是其相。“能生”:对于以转起为相的苦,它是能生者;“能令起”:对于以征相为相的苦,它是能令起者。“先前之爱”:即于所执取的苦生起之前已存在的爱。因若成立,其果方生。“他遍知此是苦之集”:此为句子的连接。“他遍知此是苦之灭”:此处亦然。“两者不转起”:即苦与集两者不转起之因,彼两者不转起于此,故称“不转起”,即无为界。“遍知苦”:即遍知苦——苦谛,以遍知现观而决断,故为“遍知苦者”,此即圣道,亦即那遍知苦的行为。其余两句,亦应依此理了知其义。显示巴利原文
386.Yathāsabhāvatoti aviparītasabhāvato. Bādhanakkhaṇato yo yo vā sabhāvo yathāsabhāvo, tato, ruppanādi kakkhaḷādisabhāvatoti attho. Janikaṃ samuṭṭhāpikanti pavattalakkhaṇassa dukkhassa janikaṃ nimittalakkhaṇassa samuṭṭhāpikaṃ. Purimataṇhanti yathāpariggahitassa dukkhassa nibbattito puretaraṃ siddhaṃ taṇhaṃ. Siddhe hi kāraṇe tassa phaluppatti. Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti pajānātīti yojanā. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ubhinnaṃ appavattinti dukkhaṃ, samudayo cāti dvinnaṃ appavattinimittaṃ, tadubhayaṃ na pavatti etāyāti appavatti, asaṅkhatā dhātu. Dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ parijānāti pariññābhisamayavasena paricchindatīti dukkhaparijānano, ariyamaggo, taṃ dukkhaparijānanaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
苦谛解说的注释显示巴利原文
Dukkhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
388 “如此所说”:即依概括方式所说。之所以用它来统摄一切众生,是因为通过“破坏欲”的角度,以反复解说的方式而阐述。“众生类”:即众生的类别,指众生的群落、众生的集体。因为在诸天、人等不同的趣中,无论是地居天、刹帝利、象,还是为饥渴等所苦的众生,依各自出生而具特殊性的众生集合,便称为“众生类”。若不依世俗方便说,则诸蕴的最初再生便是“生”,故先说“产生就是生”;然而“生”这一生起的变化,在某些蕴中尚未完全达成时,是尚需期待的。为将这些蕴与“生”一并显示,故说“具有变化”等语。“具有变化”:即带有“生起”这一变化的诸蕴。因为生、住、灭三相,即是诸法的变化差别。“由连接词装饰的词语”:此句为说明纯粹是借连接词来扩展词句。“以进入的方式”:即如进入卵壳与母胎那样。“通过出生的状态”:即诸感官处达到圆满的状态。显示巴利原文
388.Evaṃ vuttāti evaṃ uddesavasena vuttā. Sabbasattānaṃ pariyādānavacanaṃ byāpanicchāvasena āmeḍitaniddesabhāvato. Sattanikāyeti sattānaṃ nikāye, sattaghaṭe sattasamūheti attho. Devamanussādibhedāsu hi gatīsu bhummadevādikhattiyādihatthiādikhuppipāsikāditaṃtaṃjātivisiṭṭho sattasamūho sattanikāyo. Nippariyāyato khandhānaṃ paṭhamābhinibbatti jātīti katvā ‘‘jananaṃ jātī’’ti vatvā svāyaṃ uppādavikāro aparinipphanno yesu khandhesu icchitabbo, te teneva saddhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘savikārāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Savikārānanti uppādasaṅkhātena vikārena savikārānaṃ. Jātiādīni hi tīṇi lakkhaṇāni dhammānaṃ vikāravisesāti. ‘‘Upasaggamaṇḍitavevacana’’nti iminā kevalaṃ upasaggena padavaḍḍhanaṃ katanti dasseti. Anupaviṭṭhākārenāti aṇḍakosaṃ, vatthikosañca ogāhanākārena. Nibbattisaṅkhātenāti āyatanānaṃ pāripūrisaṃsiddhisaṅkhātena.
又或者说:“产生就是生”指感官处尚未完全长成的出生。“完全生”则指感官处已经完全长成的出生。圆满的出生即是“完全生”。以“进入”的意义来说,称为“入胎”,这是指卵生和胎生这两类众生的出生方式。因为它们于结生时,犹如进入卵壳、进入母胎一般。以“再生”的意义来说,称为“再生”,这是指湿生和化生这两类众生的出生方式。因为它们是一时顿然显现的。这种显明的出生就是“再生”。从“产生就是生”等句开始,是依感官处来解说;而从“入胎”等句,则是依出生的形态来解说。以此两种方式,各以两句涵盖一切众生,从而显示“生”的涵义。至于“对这些众生……再生”这段话,因为是依众生解说,所以属于世俗谛的说法。在“出现”一词中,“iti”此音有“等等”或“类别、方式”的意思,因此应知,它也将“诸处的获得”这句包含在内了。这亦属于究竟谛的说法。所谓“在一蕴有等处”,指只有一蕴、四蕴、五蕴等的生存地。在那种情况下,也就是当诸蕴出现的时候。“诸处的获得”:在一蕴有与四蕴显示巴利原文
Atha vā jananaṃ jātīti aparipuṇṇāyatanaṃ jātimāha. Sañjātīti sampuṇṇāyatanaṃ. Sampuṇṇā hi jāti sañjāti. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkantīti aṇḍajajalābujavasena jāti. Te hi aṇḍakosaṃ, vatthikosañca okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbattīti saṃsedajaopapātikavasena. Te hi pākaṭā eva hutvā nibbattanti. Abhibyattā nibbatti abhinibbatti. ‘‘Jananaṃ jātī’’tiādi āyatanavasena, yonivasena ca dvīhi dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyitvā jātiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ…pe… abhinibbattī’’ti sattavasena vuttattā sammutikathā. Pātubhāvoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena ‘‘āyatanānaṃ paṭilābho’’ti imassa padassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ayampi hi paramatthakathāti. Ekavokārabhavādīsūti ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu. Tasmiṃ khandhānaṃ pātubhāve sati. Āyatanānaṃ paṭilābhoti ekacatuvokārabhavesu dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ āyatanānaṃ vasena, sesesu rūpadhātuyaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ pañcannaṃ, kāmadhātuyaṃ vikalāvikalindriyānaṃ vasena sattannaṃ, navannaṃ, dasannaṃ, punadasannaṃ, ekādasannañca āyatanānaṃ vasena saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Pātubhavantāneva, na kutoci āgatāni. Paṭiladdhāni nāma honti sattasantānassa tassa saṃvijjamānattā. Āyatanānaṃ paṭilābhoti vā āyatanānaṃ attalābho veditabbo.
389 「自性解说」即对事物本身特质的解说。‘老’这一现象的自性,也就称为「衰老」,或称作「年岁的消减」。「老化本身就是衰老」,或者说,正在老化的状态,是借由后缀「tā」来表达的,因此说这是「状态、性质的解说」。「牙齿缺损的人」之所以称为「缺损」,是省略了后续词语的称法。由于发生那样的变化,有情被称为「齿缺」,这种变化即「齿缺性」。同理,因为有白头发,被称为「白发者」,这种状态就是「白发状态」;或者因为皮肤有皱纹,而称为「皱纹皮肤」。显示巴利原文
389.Sabhāvaniddesoti sarūpaniddeso. Sarūpañhetaṃ jiṇṇatāya, yadidaṃ ‘‘jarā’’ti, ‘‘vayohānīti vā. Jīraṇameva jīraṇatā, jīrantassa vā ākāro tā-saddena vuttoti āha ‘‘ākārabhāvaniddeso’’ti. Khaṇḍitadantā khaṇḍitā nāma uttarapadalopena. Yassa vikārassa vasena satto ‘‘khaṇḍito’’ti vuccati, taṃ khaṇḍiccaṃ. Tathā palitāni assa santīti ‘‘palito’’ti vuccati, taṃ pāliccaṃ. Valittacatāya vā vali taco assāti valittaco.
「以果代称」是指用结果的名称来称呼原因。显示巴利原文
Phalūpacārenāti phalavohārena.
390 「Cavanameva cavanatā」(正死即死之状态):即以「tā」后缀表达正在死亡的状态,或死亡者的状态。‘诸蕴坏灭’是指在一期生命中,作为蕴的相续最终阶段的那些蕴坏灭了。由于这种坏灭而进入灭尽、不再显现,因此「坏灭」也就是「消失」和「死」。所谓「Maccumaraṇaṃ(死神的死)」,是指被称为「死神」的那种——一期生命中命根断灭的死。因此说“非刹那死”。如果不将「Maccu maraṇa」当作复合词来理解,那么被称为「死神」的坏灭,与作为舍弃生命的死,这两者分别连接来解释‘这就叫做死’,也是说得通的。「寿尽」:死的刹那即是死时,因其不可逾越,故特称为「时」;寿尽即那个「时」的作用。从究竟意义上说,它就是死时那些蕴的坏灭达成;或者按照世间的说法,“时间终点终结的作用”,这就是「死」、「死亡」的意思。以上全都是世俗的解说,因为是从“对于那些各类有情……”这样依于有情的角度来说的。而下面则是究竟的解说,因为这是从究竟意义上,阐明那些……显示巴利原文
390. Cavanameva cavanatā, cavantassa vā ākāro tā-saddena vutto. Khandhā bhijjantīti ekabhavapariyāpannassa khandhasantānassa pariyosānabhūtā khandhā bhijjanti, teneva bhedena nirodhanaṃ adassanaṃ gacchanti, tasmā bhedo antaradhānaṃ maraṇaṃ. Maccumaraṇanti maccusaṅkhātaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyupacchedabhūtaṃ maraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na khaṇikamaraṇa’’nti. ‘‘Maccu maraṇa’’nti samāsaṃ akatvā yo ‘‘maccū’’ti vuccati bhedo, yañca maraṇaṃ pāṇacāgo, idaṃ vuccati maraṇanti visuṃ sambandho na na yujjati. Kālakiriyāti maraṇakālo, anatikkamanīyattā visesena ‘‘kālo’’ti vuttoti tassa kiriyā, atthato cutikhandhānaṃ bhedappattiyeva, kālassa vā antakassa kiriyāti yā loke vuccati, sā cuti, maraṇanti attho. Ayaṃ sabbāpi sammutikathāva ‘‘yaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ sattāna’’ntiādinā sattavasena vuttattā. Ayaṃ paramatthakathā paramatthato labbhamānānaṃ ruppanādisabhāvānaṃ dhammānaṃ vinassanajotanābhāvato.
「Attā」即心依此而存在,故称为「有身」(attabhāvo)——意指诸蕴的集合。将其「放下」,即是舍弃、抛下、令其坏灭。义注中以“已达死者……”等语说明:由于“放下”是导致坏灭的原因,故借果说因,将作为结果的“抛下”称为「放下」。“诸蕴的坏灭”是指依相续而转起的法之集合坏灭,这还部分属于究竟说;而“命根的断绝”则完全没有世俗表达的残余,因此说:“命根的断绝,才是在一切方面都完全就究竟义而说的死”。即便如此,因为某种程度的诸蕴坏灭发生,世间方有“提舍死了,补沙死了”的说法,这种并未彻底断尽蕴相续的坏灭可得名为「世俗死」,因此说“这也称为世俗死”。接着又说“那确实是指命根断绝”等。因为只有彻底断尽相续,才叫做「断灭死」。显示巴利原文
Attāti bhavati ettha cittanti attabhāvo, khandhasamūho, tassa nikkhepo nikkhipanaṃ, pātanaṃ vināsoti attho. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘maraṇaṃ pattassā’’tiādinā nikkhepahetutāya patanaṃ ‘‘nikkhepo’’ti phalūpacārena vuttanti dasseti. ‘‘Khandhānaṃ bhedo’’ti pabandhavasena pavattamānassa dhammasamūhassa vināsajotanāti ekadesato paramatthakathā, ‘‘jīvitindriyassa upacchedo’’ti panettha na koci vohāraleso pīti āha ‘‘jīvitindriyassa upacchedo pana sabbākārato paramatthato maraṇa’’nti. Evaṃ santepi yassa khandhabhedassa pavattattā ‘‘tisso mato, phusso mato’’ti vohāro hoti, so bhedo khandhappabandhassa anupacchinnatāya ‘‘sammutimaraṇa’’nti vattabbataṃ arahatīti āha ‘‘etadeva sammutimaraṇantipi vuccatī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘jīvitindriyupacchedameva hī’’tiādi. Sabbaso pabandhasamucchedo hi samucchedamaraṇanti.
391 「以灾祸」(byasanena):即以无利益、有害之事。如同“法无碍解”等语境中(《分别论》721)的“法”字是原因的同义词,故此处解释说“以苦的因”。「忧伤」(socanaṃ):因其具有可被认知的相状,所以说有忧伤相。一位忧伤者或一颗忧伤之心的状态,称为忧伤性(socitabhāvo)。「内部」(abbhantare):即有身的内部。「令枯竭」(sosento):因其自性粗涩而能使之枯竭。「令彻底枯竭」(parisosento):力量强大,能从四面八方全面地使之枯竭。显示巴利原文
391.Byasanenāti anatthena. ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 721) viya dhamma-saddo hetupariyāyoti āha ‘‘dukkhakāraṇenā’’ti. Socananti lakkhitabbatāya socanalakkhaṇo. Socitassa socanakassa puggalassa, cittassa vā bhāvo socitabhāvo. Abbhantareti attabhāvassa anto. Attano lūkhasabhāvatāya sosento. Thāmagamanena samantato sosanavasena parisosento.
392 「Ādissa ādissa devanti paridevanti etenāti ādevo」:被称作「ādevana」(悲泣),是指那些陷入流泪等变化的人,因其产生那种变化,此词便从原因的角度被用来指称那种声音。『种种功德』(taṃtaṃ vaṇṇaṃ):即种种优点。『正是它的』(tasseva):就是指悲泣与悲叹本身。『状态之描述』(bhāvaniddesā):即「ādevitattaṃ paridevitattaṃ」(处于悲泣的状态、处于悲叹的状态),这是对状态的描述。显示巴利原文
392.‘‘Ādissa ādissa devanti paridevanti etenāti ādevo’’ti ādevana-saddaṃ katvā assumocanādivikāraṃ āpajjantānaṃ tabbikārāpattiyā so saddo kāraṇabhāvena vutto. Taṃtaṃ vaṇṇanti taṃ taṃ guṇaṃ. Tassevāti ādevaparidevasseva. Bhāvaniddesāti ‘‘ādevitattaṃ paridevitatta’’nti bhāvaniddesā.
393 「kāyikaṃ」(身体上的):以身为依处,故说身体上的。因此说‘以身体的感官净色为所依’。因其难以忍受,故称「dukkhamanaṃ」(苦受),苦受即其自性,由此而说。因其与乐相离,故称「asātaṃ」(不可意)。显示巴利原文
393. Nissayabhūto kāyo etassa atthīti kāyikaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kāyapasādavatthuka’’nti. Dukkaraṃ khamanaṃ etassāti dukkhamanaṃ, so eva attho sabhāvoti dukkhamanaṭṭho, tena. Sātavidhuratāya asātaṃ.
394 「cetasikaṃ」(心所):存在于心中,故称心所。又因它以种种方式与心相应结合,故解释为‘与心相应’。显示巴利原文
394. Cetasi bhavanti cetasikaṃ, taṃ pana yasmā cittena samaṃ pakārehi yuttaṃ, tasmā āha ‘‘cittasampayutta’’nti.
395 「saṃsīdanaṃ」(沉陷):由于障碍对一切所缘的趣入,故从各方面沉没。因其能令人连振作起来也无法做到,故是极强力、或扭曲变形的沉陷,称为「visīdanaṃ」(极度沉陷)。「cittakilamatho」(心疲倦):以极度沉陷的方式,令心疲惫。「upāyāso」(绝望):其本身并非苦受,因其本質为瞋恚,或属行蕴所摄的其他法。若有人将‘忧’直接说为‘绝望’,即应以‘绝望与三蕴、一处、一界相应,与一蕴、一处、一界部分相应’(《界论》249)等经文予以驳斥。此处‘upa-’前缀意为‘极度、很强’,故说‘较愁更强的即是绝望’。这仅是状态描述的说法,旨在阐明法的自性,亦即显示除了法之外别无作者;既无作者,便无作者所作之事,亦无所应执取之物,故说‘这是显示无我、无我所的状态描述’。显示巴利原文
395. Sabbavisayapaṭipattinivāraṇavasena samantato sīdanaṃ saṃsīdanaṃ. Uṭṭhātumpi asakkuṇeyyatākaraṇavasena atibalavaṃ, virūpaṃ vā sīdanaṃ visīdanaṃ. Cittakilamathoti visīdanākārena cittassa parikhedo. Upāyāso, sayaṃ na dukkho dosattā, saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannadhammantarattā vā. Ye pana domanassameva ‘‘upāyāso’’ti vadeyyuṃ, te ‘‘upāyāso tīhi khandhehi ekenāyatanena ekāya dhātuyā sampayutto, ekena khandhena ekenāyatanena ekāya dhātuyā kehici sampayutto’’ti (dhātu. 249). Imāya pāḷiyā paṭikkhipitabbā. Upa-saddo bhusatthoti āha ‘‘balavataraṃ āyāso upāyāso’’ti. Dhammamattatādīpano bhāvaniddeso dhammato aññassa kattuabhāvajotano, asati ca kattari tena kattabbassa, pariggahetabbassa ca abhāvo evāti āha ‘‘attattaniyābhāvadīpakābhāvaniddesā’’ti.
398 「具生法者」(jātidhammānaṃ):此处“法”字是“自性”的同义词,故解释说“具生之自性者”,意即生为其本性。修习道,是发起修道愿的原因,因此所应希求的乃是修道。为遮止那种不修道而仅作空想的欲求,才说“若不修习道”。另一种理解方式:其实并非只是那样希求便可得。也就是说,诸如“啊,但愿我们不是具生法者,但愿生不要降临到我们身上”这般,去希求那存在于已断集谛的圣者身上的“不生”之性,以及存在于已般涅槃的圣者身上的“生不再来”之态。然而,即便是希求这些,若缺乏道的修习也无法达到;反之,即使你并不特别希求,通过修习也能获得。所以,这根本不是仅凭希求便可得到之事。于此,应如此理解其义。“pi”字的作用是总括后文将述之义,故说“此处的‘pi’字是涵盖上面所余诸项”。“yaṃ”(那个)表示原因,属具格、对格,故说“通过那个法、因为那个法”,此处“法”字为原因之义,此原因当理解为事物之“不可得性”。或……显示巴利原文
398.Jātidhammānanti ettha dhamma-saddo pakatipariyāyoti āha ‘‘jātisabhāvāna’’nti, jāyanapakatikānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Maggabhāvanāya maggabhāvanicchāhetukatā icchitabbāti tādisaṃ icchaṃ nivattento ‘‘vinā maggabhāvana’’nti āha. Aparo nayo na kho panetanti yametaṃ ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ na jātidhammā assāma, na ca vata no jāti āgaccheyyā’’ti evaṃ pahīnasamudayesu ariyesu vijjamānaṃ ajātidhammattaṃ, parinibbutesu ca vijjamānaṃ jātiyā anāgamanaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ icchantassāpi maggabhāvanāya vinā appattabbato , anicchantassāpi bhāvanāya pattabbato na icchāya pattabbaṃ nāma hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Vakkhamānatthasampiṇḍanattho pi-saddoti āha ‘‘upari sesāni upādāya pi-kāro’’ti. Yanti hetuatthe karaṇe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘yenapi dhammenā’’ti. Hetuattho hi ayaṃ dhamma-saddo , alabbhaneyyabhāvo ettha hetu veditabbo. Tanti vā icchitassa vatthuno alabbhanaṃ, evamettha ‘‘yampīti yenapī’’ti vibhattivipallāsena attho vutto. Yadā pana yaṃ-saddo ‘‘iccha’’nti etaṃ apekkhati, tadā alābhavisiṭṭhā icchā vuttā hoti. Yadā pana ‘‘na labhatī’’ti etaṃ apekkhati, tadā icchāvisiṭṭho alābho vutto hoti, so pana atthato añño dhammo natthi, tathāpi alabbhaneyyavatthugatā icchāva vuttā hoti. Sabbatthāti ‘‘jarādhammāna’’ntiādinā āgatesu sabbavāresu.
对集圣谛的解释的注释显示巴利原文
Samudayasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
400 「再有」(punobbhavo):即造作后有。省略后分之后,如同“mano”一词,前分以“o”结尾,应作如是观。或者,依习性义,“ika”后缀已表其义,故此处不显明动作之词,犹如“asūpiko”(惯食粥者)。而在《迷惑冰消》中则解释:“给予后有”(punabbhavaṃ deti)、“导致后有”(punabbhavāya saṃvattati)、“屡屡令生于有”(punappunaṃ bhave nibbatteti),故称“导致再有”(ponobbhavikā)。此乃依派生词的复数指示而说,或因派生词用法多样,或因派生词乃约定俗成,故于他们义中,“ponobbhavika”一词亦可成立,因而作如是言。其中,与业俱生的业给予后有;非俱生、而为业之助伴的业导致后有;两者皆是屡屡令生于有,应作此解。以喜为义、以染着为义而称为“喜爱染着”(nandīrāga);喜爱染着中的“喜”与“染着”,以及以渴爱……显示巴利原文
400.Punabbhavakaraṇaṃ punobbhavo uttarapadalopaṃ katvā mano-saddassa viya purimapadassa o-kārantatā daṭṭhabbā. Atha vā sīlanaṭṭhena ika-saddena gamitatthattā kiriyāvācakassa saddassa adassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ yathā ‘‘asūpabhakkhanasīlo asūpiko’’ti. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ pana ‘‘punabbhavaṃ deti, punabbhavāya saṃvattati, punappunaṃ bhave nibbattetīti ponobbhavikā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 203) attho vutto so ‘‘taddhitā’’ iti bahuvacananiddesato, vicittattā vā taddhitavuttiyā, abhidhānalakkhaṇattā vā taddhitānaṃ tesupi atthesu ponobbhavikasaddasiddhi sambhaveyyāti katvā vutto. Tattha kammunā sahajātā punabbhavaṃ deti, asahajātā kammasahāyabhūtā punabbhavāya saṃvattati, duvidhāpi punappunaṃ bhave nibbattetīti daṭṭhabbā. Nandanaṭṭhena, rañjanaṭṭhena ca nandīrāgo, yo ca nandīrāgo, yā ca taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā, ubhayametaṃ ekatthaṃ, byañjanameva nānanti taṇhā ‘‘nandīrāgena saddhiṃ atthato ekattameva gatā’’ti vuttā. Tabbhāvattho hettha saha-saddo ‘‘sanidassanā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 9) viya. Tasmā nandīrāgasahagatāti nandīrāgabhāvaṃ gatā sabbāsupi avatthāsu nandīrāgabhāvassa apaccakkhāya vattanatoti attho. Rāgasambandhena uppannassāti vuttaṃ. Rūpārūpabhavarāgassa visuṃ vuccamānattā kāmabhave eva bhavapatthanuppatti vuttāti veditabbā.
于一一可爱之境,依其初次生起而称为“生起”(uppajjati),依其反复转起而称为“安住”(nivisati)。或者,也可依缠缚与随眠之理,将生起与安住配合理解。“成就”(sampatti),指人的荣华与天界之成就。“自己的眼”,指有依处之眼,或说有净色的肉团。“清净、具五种净色”,指极为清净明澈,具青、黄、赤、黑、白等色。内部洁白,有如银管,中间有孔。如系于耳环上的装饰之绳。高耸、上挺、修长之鼻,称为高鼻,如此而得名的自己的鼻。或读作“得名者”(laddhavohārā),若是,则那些拥有高鼻的有情被称为高鼻者,如此而得名的有情,于自己的鼻应作如此结合理解。“舌……他思惟”,指从颜色、形状与作用来思惟。“身……他思惟”,指从身量与体态的成就来思惟。“意……他思惟”,指能念过去、未来等义之心。“自身所得之身香等,及外在涂香等”。“当其生起时,便于此生起”,此是总说,以生起之相为相,而所缘的差别则应被了知,因为总相与别相并非不……显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ piyarūpe paṭhamuppattivasena ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ, punappunaṃ pavattivasena ‘‘nivisatī’’ti. Pariyuṭṭhānānusayavasena vā uppattinivesā yojetabbā. Sampattiyanti manussasobhagge, devatte ca. Attano cakkhunti savatthukaṃ cakkhuṃ vadati, sapasādaṃ vā maṃsapiṇḍaṃ. Vippasannaṃ pañcapasādanti parisuddhasuppasannanīlapītalohitakaṇhaodātavaṇṇavantaṃ. Rajatapanāḷikaṃ viya chiddaṃ abbhantare odātattā. Pāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya ālambakaṇṇabaddhaṃ. Tuṅgā uccā dīghā nāsikā tuṅganāsā, evaṃ laddhavohāraṃ attano ghānaṃ. ‘‘Laddhavohārā’’ti vā pāṭho, tasmiṃ sati tuṅgā nāsā yesaṃ te tuṅganāsā, evaṃ laddhavohārā sattā attano ghānanti yojanā kātabbā. Jivhaṃ…pe… maññanti vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato, kiccato ca. Kāyaṃ…pe… maññanti ārohapariṇāhasampattiyā. Manaṃ…pe… maññanti atītādiatthacintanasamatthaṃ. Attanā paṭiladdhāni ajjhattañca sarīragandhādīni, bahiddhā ca vilepanagandhādīni. Uppajjamānā uppajjatīti yadā uppajjamānā hoti, tadā ettha uppajjatīti sāmaññena gahitā uppādakiriyā lakkhaṇabhāvena vuttā, visayavisiṭṭhā ca lakkhitabbabhāvena. Na hi sāmaññavisesehi nānattavohāro na hotīti. Uppajjamānāti vā anicchito uppādo hetubhāvena vutto, uppajjatīti nicchito phalabhāvena yadi uppajjamānā hoti, ettha uppajjatīti.
对灭谛的解释的注释显示巴利原文
Nirodhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
401 在说出“所有这些都只是涅槃的同义词”之后,为了更清楚地阐明此义,接着又说“因为涅槃……”等。其中,“依止”(āgamma):指作为原因、作为相。因为涅槃,正是对渴爱完全离贪与灭尽的因。通过尽灭的方式而离贪;通过不转起的方式而灭;由于不再期待而弃舍,或由于断除而弃舍(cajīyati);为了不再转起,如同远远抛开一般地彻底舍离(paṭinissajjīyati);从如同系缚中解脱出来(muccati);无有染污,故不黏着(na allīyati)。然而,为何涅槃只有一个,却用许多不同的名称来称呼呢?为显示“由于对立面多种多样”,所以接着说道“因为只有一个……”等。由于涅槃的自性与一切有为法相反,其名称也因这些功德相,而与有为法的名称相对而立,故说“以与一切有为法的名称相对立的方式”。在此,渴爱的完全离贪,故称“完全离贪”(asesavirāga)。对其余名称也可依此类推。不过这里有一差别:涅槃没有生起,或者说,证得涅槃的人不再有生,故称“无生”(anuppāda),指的是无为法。对于显示巴利原文
401. ‘‘Sabbāni nibbānavevacanānevā’’ti vatvā tamatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘nibbānañhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha āgammāti nimittaṃ katvā. Nibbānahetuko hi taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho. Khayagamanavasena virajjati. Appavattigamanavasena nirujjhati. Anapekkhatāya cajanavasena, hānivasena vā cajīyati. Puna yathā nappavattati, tathā dūra khipanavasena paṭinissajjīyati. Bandhanabhūtāya mocanavasena muccati. Asaṃkilesavasena na allīyati. Kasmā panetaṃ nibbānaṃ ekameva samānaṃ nānānāmehi vuccatīti? Paṭipakkhanānatāyāti dassento ‘‘ekameva hī’’tiādimāha. Saṅkhatadhammavidhurasabhāvattā nibbānassa nāmānipi guṇanemittikattā saṅkhatadhammavidhurāneva hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ nāmapaṭipakkhavasenā’’ti. Asesaṃ virajjati taṇhā etthāti asesavirāgoti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Ayaṃ pana viseso – natthi etassa uppādo, na vā etasmiṃ adhigate puggalassa uppādoti anuppādo, asaṅkhatadhammo. ‘‘Appavatta’’ntiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Āyūhanaṃ samudayo, tappaṭipakkhavasena anāyūhanaṃ.
当渴爱未被断除时,它便在何处生起;一旦被断除,就在彼处它不复存在,这便清晰地显示了出来,所以说“显示就在那里的不存在”。“未制立”(apaññatti):指没有施设,或者说,没有“有苦瓜”这样的名称、表述。犹如有人希望苦瓜藤不再生起,圣道便如同此人那趋向于使苦瓜藤不再生起的心,而以涅槃为所缘、断除渴爱的道即是根绝;至于涅槃作为渴爱的不生起状态,则如同苦瓜藤的不生起。应当这样来理解。显示巴利原文
Taṇhā appahīne sati yattha uppajjati, pahāne pana sati tattha tatthevassā abhāvo sudassitoti āha ‘‘tattheva abhāvaṃ dassetu’’nti. Apaññattinti apaññāpanaṃ, ‘‘titta alābu atthī’’ti vohārābhāvaṃ vā. Tittaalābuvalliyā appavattiṃ icchanto puriso viya ariyamaggo, tassa tassā appavattininnacittassa mūlacchedanaṃ viya maggassa nibbānārammaṇassa taṇhāya pahānaṃ, tadappavatti viya taṇhāya appavattibhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在第二个譬喻中,涅槃如同南门,道如同刽子手。那些在南门被杀的贼,后来被称为“在森林里被杀的贼”;同样,依止涅槃而灭尽的渴爱,也被称为“在眼等处被灭”,应知这是因为在那里已不再起作用的缘故。或者,前一譬喻为显示:由道灭尽的渴爱,应称为“在可爱、可意的事物中被灭”;后一譬喻则为显示:依止涅槃而灭尽的渴爱,也应称为“在可爱、可意的事物中被灭”。这便是它们的差别。显示巴利原文
Dutiyaupamāyaṃ dakkhiṇadvāraṃ viya nibbānaṃ, coraghātakā viya maggo. Dakkhiṇadvāre ghātitāpi corā pacchā ‘‘aṭaviyaṃ corā ghātitā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ nibbānaṃ āgamma niruddhāpi taṇhā ‘‘cakkhādīsu niruddhā’’ti vuccati tattha kiccakaraṇābhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimā vā upamā maggena niruddhāya ‘‘piyarūpasātarūpesu niruddhā’’ti vattabbatādassanatthaṃ vuttā, pacchimā nibbānaṃ āgamma niruddhāya ‘‘piyarūpasātarūpesu niruddhā’’ti vattabbatādassanatthaṃ vuttāti ayaṃ etāsaṃ viseso.
对道谛的解释的注释显示巴利原文
Maggasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
402 “遮止他道”的意思:是为了遮止外道所安立的、并非导向苦灭之修行道的缘故;或者,遮止其他的所谓道,即是“遮止他道”,正是为了这个目的。而“这”字,是对自己以及那些比丘中的某些人而言,由于是现前亲证的缘故,因此是近乎表达现前亲证的说法。“由于远离”:这是依词源学的方法来说明“圣”这个词的构成。“由于能作圣的状态”:“能作圣”就是“圣”,这里省略了后面的词;因为能使那个人成为圣,或者“圣”的意思是令其成为圣;又或者,因为获得圣果,“圣”的意思是令得其果、令生起其果。在这里应如此理解:前一种说法是就其自身功能而言,后一种说法是依所证的果来获得“圣”这个名称的。“四谛业处”:能带来四谛通达的业处,就是四谛业处;或者,以四谛为所缘而进行的修行业处,是瑜伽行者殊胜安乐的立足处,故称四谛业处。前两谛属于“轮转”,因为它们是导致流转的原因。后两谛属于“还灭”,因为它们是导致还灭以及证得还灭的方便。在轮转的范畴内,有对业处的投入,因为从自相上能把握它;在还灭的范畴内,则没有这种投入,因为它并非毗婆舍那的所缘。显示巴利原文
402.Aññamaggapaṭikkhepanatthanti titthiyehi parikappitassa maggassa dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadābhāvapaṭikkhepanatthaṃ, aññassa vā maggabhāvapaṭikkhepo aññamaggapaṭikkhepo, tadatthaṃ. ‘‘Aya’’nti pana attano, tesu ca bhikkhūsu ekaccānaṃ paccakkhabhāvato āsannapaccakkhavacanaṃ. Ārakattāti niruttinayena ariyasaddasiddhimāha. Ariyabhāvakarattāti ariyakaraṇo ariyoti uttarapadalopena, puggalassa ariyabhāvakarattā ariyaṃ karotīti vā ariyo, ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā vā ariyaṃ phalaṃ labhāpeti janetīti ariyo. Purimena cettha attano kiccavasena, pacchimena phalavasena ariyanāmalābho vuttoti daṭṭhabbo. Catusaccapaṭivedhāvahaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ, catusaccaṃ vā uddissa pavattaṃ bhāvanākammaṃ yogino sukhavisesānaṃ ṭhānabhūtanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Purimāni dve saccānivaṭṭaṃ pavattihetubhāvato. Pacchimāni vivaṭṭaṃ nivattitadadhigamupāyabhāvato. Vaṭṭe kammaṭṭhānābhiniveso sarūpato pariggahasabbhāvato. Vivaṭṭe natthi avisayattā, visayatte ca payojanābhāvato. Purimāni dve saccāni uggaṇhitvāti sambandho. Kammaṭṭhānapāḷiyā hi tadatthasallakkhaṇena vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Tenāha ‘‘vācāya punappunaṃ parivattento’’ti. Iṭṭhaṃ kantanti nirodhamaggesu ninnabhāvaṃ dasseti, na abhinandanaṃ, tanninnabhāvoyeva ca tattha kammakaraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“以同一通达”:就是以同一个智的洞察。所谓“通达”,是因为无有障碍,于所缘中无执著而行,这称为洞察。所谓“现观”,是不偏离地证得所缘,这称为觉了。“这是苦,仅仅这么多就是苦,没有比这更多的苦”,如此决断之后而了知,这就是依前面所说的理路而说的“遍知通达”。这是依据那智生起之后,在确定苦的自相、分际等方面不再有痴迷,而把握其运行状态来解说的,并非因为道智像“这是苦……”那样去运作。“以断除通达”:已断除的烦恼,由于不可再被断除,所以那殊胜的舍断、抛弃、彻底斩断本身就是“断除”;依前面所说的理路,这称为“断除通达”。这也是指:那些烦恼在被断除时,在道的修行中不应再有存在的可能;如果没有道的修行,那些烦恼本会生起,而此智通过破除其障碍,令其达到不再生起的状态,依此在如此运行中,由于无有障碍、无执著而行,所以如此称呼。“以作证通达”:所谓“作证”,是现前亲证,抛开依靠传闻、推比思惟等方式,而是以如实的状态为所缘,切实地把握“这就是它”,以自性状态去把握;依前面所说的理路,这就称为“作证通达”。这也是指:通过此智,涅槃在现前被亲证,在证的运行中无有障碍、无执著而行,是在这个意义上如此称呼的。显示巴利原文
Ekapaṭivedhenevāti ekañāṇeneva paṭivijjhanena. Paṭivedho paṭighātābhāvena visaye nissaṅgacārasaṅkhātaṃ nibbijjhanaṃ. Abhisamayo avirajjhitvā visayassa adhigamasaṅkhāto avabodho. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti paricchinditvā jānanameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pariññāpaṭivedho, tena. Idañca yathā tasmiṃ ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattiṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, na pana maggañāṇassa ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 2.484; 3.104) pavattanato. Pahīnassa puna appahātabbatāya pakaṭṭhaṃ hānaṃ cajanaṃ samucchindanaṃ, pahānameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pahānapaṭivedho, tena. Ayampi yasmiṃ kilese appahīyamāne maggabhāvanāya na bhavitabbaṃ, asati ca maggabhāvanāya yo uppajjeyya, tassa kilesassa paṭighātaṃ karontassa anuppattidhammataṃ āpādentassa ñāṇassa tathāpavattiyaṃ paṭighātābhāvena nissaṅgacāraṃ upādāya evaṃ vutto. Sacchikiriyā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ anussavākāraparivitakkādike muñcitvā sarūpato ārammaṇakaraṇaṃ ‘‘idaṃ ta’’nti yathāsabhāvato gahaṇaṃ, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti sacchikiriyāpaṭivedho, tena. Ayaṃ panassa āvaraṇassa asamucchindanato ñāṇaṃ nirodhaṃ ālambituṃ na sakkoti, tassa samucchindanato taṃ sarūpato vibhāventameva pavattatīti evaṃ vutto. Bhāvanā uppādanā, vaḍḍhanā ca. Tattha paṭhamamagge uppādanaṭṭhena, dutiyādīsu vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena, ubhayatthāpi vā ubhayathāpi veditabbaṃ. Paṭhamamaggepi hi yathārahaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminiyaṃ pavattaṃ parijānanādiṃ vaḍḍhento pavattoti vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanā sakkā viññātuṃ. Dutiyādīsupi appahīnakilesappahānato, puggalantarabhāvasādhanato ca uppādanaṭṭhena bhāvanā sakkā viññātuṃ, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti bhāvanāpaṭivedho, tena. Ayampi hi yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā maggadhammānaṃ sarūpaparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattimeva gahetvā vutto.
且不论那些如实证得的道法,就是在依其生起而运作的果法中,他也如同在如实证得的谛法中一样,是远离痴惑的。因此世尊说:“已见法、已得法、已知法、已深入法。”由于此缘,因为法尔自然的催动力,以如实证得的谛法为所缘,在道心路之后,会生起对道、果、已断尽的烦恼、残余的烦恼以及涅槃的观察;对苦谛也会观察身见等。这层含义在解释“以遍知现观……”等句子时也应阐明。“以同一现观而现观”:在此处,有诡辩者说:“圣道智是于四谛之上,以种种不同的现观来发挥作用的。”他理应在《论事》中被“分说论”所说服。现在,为了详细阐明那同一种现观,而说:“如是,他……”等。“于前分……有通达”,为何这样说?难道通达不是前分的吗?从严格非权设的意义上说,确实不是;但这里是把在学习等阶段生起的觉了,以权设的方式这样说。或者,因为它是通达的因相,所以在苦等前分的智被称为“通达”,并非说其本身有洞察的本质。“于功用”:因为前分阶段苦等智所应作的功能,在此处得到了成就;或者是指此智本身就具有显示苦等的功能,即遍知等功能,是这个意思。“所缘通达”,即于所缘中通达,这是依词源作释。显示巴利原文
Tiṭṭhantu tāva yathādhigatā maggadhammā, yathāpavattesu phaladhammesupi ayaṃ yathādhigatasaccadhammesu viya vigatasammohova hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti (mahāva. 18; dī. ni. 1.299; ma. ni. 2.69) yato sacassa dhammatāsañcoditā yathādhigatasaccadhammālambaniyo maggavīthito parato maggaphalapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesanibbānānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā pavattanti, dukkhasaccammopi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo. Ayañca atthavaṇṇanā ‘‘pariññābhisamayenā’’tiādīsupi vibhāvetabbā. Ekābhisamayena abhisametīti etthāha vitaṇḍavādī ‘‘ariyamaggañāṇaṃ catūsu saccesu nānābhisamayavasena kiccakara’’nti, so abhidhamme (kathā. 274) odhisokathāya saññāpetabbo. Idāni tameva ekābhisamayaṃ vitthāravasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘evamassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pubbabhāge…pe… paṭivedho hotī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu paṭivedho pubbabhāgiyo na hotīti? Saccametaṃ nippariyāyato, idha pana uggahādivasena pavatto avabodho pariyāyato tathā vutto. Paṭivedhanimittattā vā uggahādivasena pavattaṃ dukkhādīsu pubbabhāge ñāṇaṃ ‘‘paṭivedho’’ti vuttaṃ, na paṭivijjhanasabhāvaṃ. Kiccatoti pubbabhāgehi dukkhādiñāṇehi kātabbakiccassa idha nipphattito, imasseva vā ñāṇassa dukkhādippakāsanakiccato, pariññāditoti attho. Ārammaṇapaṭivedhoti sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhamāha. Sāti paccavekkhaṇā. Idhāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne. Uggahādīsu vuccamānesu na vuttā anavasarattā. Adhigame hi sati tassā siyā avasaro.
正是为了显示没有机会,才说“而对此……”等语。“前已把握”:是指在把握业处之前。通过领受等方式通达诸谛,称为“把握”。由于如此把握,因作意力的巩固,在前分阶段便一定会成就苦的遍知等,所以说“自把握时起就有”。“后时”:指在道刹那。“难见”:因为虽然就它自身生起的刹那来说是明显的,但想要以普通智如实见到它的自性状态,是无法做到的。而且只有以甚深的修习智,尤其是达到了顶点的圣道智,才能如实观见,因此那些谛极为“甚深”。所以他说:“然而从自相通达来看,两者都甚深。”其余(灭谛等),因为是无杂染、非杂染法,达到了极乐,处于未曾生起的状况,且从未生起过,在运行层面并不显著,因此极为甚深;同样,只有以极甚深的智慧才能观见,以普通智无法见到,所以说它们“难见”。因此他说:“而其余者……”等。“努力”:指行为或精进。为了显示那更大的应希求性和更难行的特性,而以譬喻说明:“为了把握有顶”等。“在通达的刹那”:指圣道全证四谛的那一刹那。“唯有那一智”:是指在苦等诸谛上,以成就遍知等不同功能而运作的方式——显示巴利原文
Taṃyeva hi anavasaraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pubbe pariggahatoti kammaṭṭhānapariggahato pubbe. Uggahādivasena saccānaṃ pariggaṇhanañhi pariggaho. Tathā tāni pariggaṇhanato manasikāradaḷhatāya pubbabhāgiyā dukkhapariññādayo honti yevāti āha ‘‘pariggahato paṭṭhāya hotī’’ti. Aparabhāgeti maggakkhaṇe. Duddasattāti attano pavattikkhaṇavasena pākaṭānipi pakatiñāṇena sabhāvarasato daṭṭhuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā. Gambhīreneva ca bhāvanāñāṇena, tathāpi matthakappattena ariyamaggañāṇeneva yāthāvato passitabbattā gambhīrāni. Tenāha ‘‘lakkhaṇapaṭivedhato pana ubhayampi gambhīra’’nti. Itarāni asaṃkiliṭṭhaasaṃkilesikatāya accantasukhappattāya anuppattibhavatāya, anuppannapubbatāya ca pavattivasena apākaṭattā ca paramagambhīrattā, tathā paramagambhīrañāṇeneva passitabbatāya pakatiñāṇena daṭṭhuṃ na sakkuṇeyyānīti duddasāni. Tenāha ‘‘itaresaṃ panā’’tiādi. Payogoti kiriyā, vāyāmo vā. Tassa mahantatarassa icchitabbataṃ, dukkarataratañca upamāhi dasseti ‘‘bhavaggaggahaṇattha’’ntiādinā. Paṭivedhakkhaṇeti ariyassa maggassa catusaccasampaṭivedhakkhaṇe. Ekameva taṃ ñāṇanti dukkhādīsu pariññādikiccasādhanavasena ekameva taṃ maggañāṇaṃ hoti.
“在这三处”:是指依应远离的层面所阐明的三种处所,即欲寻思、嗔寻思、害寻思的对象。“各别生起的三不善寻思”。“从断道而言”:此处,所行的道路称为“道”,而欲寻思等生起的途径、原因,便是它所行的“道”;切断、摧毁此道,就是“断道”,所以称为从断道。“令未达成的法达成”就是实现未达成,依此而说。当圆满道支——也就是完成道的作用时,一个善寻思生起,同时便完成三种作用。在此处,正因斩断三种不善寻思本身即是完成三种作用,应如此看待。以此类推,“在这四处”等句的含义也应这样理解。显示巴利原文
Imesu tīsu ṭhānesūti imesu viramitabbatāvasena jotitesu tīsu kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāvitakkavatthūsu. Visuṃ visuṃ uppannassa tividhaakusalasaṅkappassa. Padapacchedatoti ettha gatamaggo ‘‘pada’’nti vuccati, yena ca upāyena kāraṇena kāmavitakko uppajjati, so tassa gatamaggoti tassa pacchedo ghāto padapacchedo, tato padapacchedato. Anuppattidhammatāpādanaṃ anuppattisādhanaṃ, tassa vasena. Maggakiccasādhanena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamāno ekova tividhakiccasādhano kusalasaṅkappo uppajjati. Tividhākusalasaṅkappasamucchedanameva hettha tividhakiccasādhanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Iminā nayena ‘‘imesu catūsu ṭhānesū’’tiādīsupi attho veditabbo.
“离妄语等”:在此,由于《学处分别》中提到了离的思心所以及一切相应法都是学处,所以《迷惑冰消》中说:“有以离的,也有以思的。”因此,有些人说:“‘等’字并非只包含离离间语等,也包含了同类的那些思。”这种说法因为是在前分阶段而说,或许可以讲得通。在远离妄语等的时候,应当配合离;而在说善妙语等的时候,则应当配合思。然而在道刹那,只应取离,因为思并非道支。正如一个智具有苦等不同智的区分,一个离具有离妄语等不同离的区分;但一个思并没有同时完成正语等三种作用的本质,因此不能成立其为正语等。如果那样成立,就会导致道支只有三个的过失了。显示巴利原文
Musāvādāveramaṇiādayoti ettha yasmā sikkhāpadavibhaṅge (vibha. 703) viraticetanā, sabbe sampayuttadhammā ca sikkhāpadānīti āgatānīti tattha padhānānaṃ viraticetanānaṃ vasena ‘‘viratiyopi honti cetanāyopī’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 703) sammohavinodaniyaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā keci ‘‘ādi-saddena na kevalaṃ pisuṇavācā veramaṇiādīnaṃyeva saṅgaho, atha kho tādisānaṃ cetanānampi saṅgaho’’ti vadanti, taṃ pubbabhāgavasena vuccamānattā yujjeyya, musāvādādīhi viramaṇakāle vā viratiyo, subhāsitādivācābhāsanādikāle ca cetanāyo yojetabbā, maggakkhaṇe pana viratiyova icchitabbā cetanānaṃ amaggaṅgattā. Ekassa ñāṇassa dukkhādiñāṇatā viya, ekāya viratiyā musāvādādiviratibhāvo viya ca ekāya cetanāya sammāvācādikiccattayasādhanasabhāvābhāvā sammāvācādibhāvāsiddhito, taṃsiddhiyaṃ aṅgattayatāsiddhito ca.
比丘因活命而生起的身、语恶行,必定是以不如理寻求饮食为因,因此说:“嚼食……恶行”。特别举出“身、语恶行”,是为了表明活命的败坏只发生在身门与语门,而不发生在意门。所以论中说:“就在此七处”。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhussa ājīvahetukaṃ kāyavacīduccaritaṃ nāma ayoniso āhārapariyesanahetukameva siyāti āha ‘‘khādanīya…pe… duccarita’’nti. Kāyavacīduccaritaggahaṇañca kāyavacīdvāreyeva ājīvapakopo, na manodvāreti dassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘imesuyeva sattasu ṭhānesū’’ti.
“未生的”:指就未现行而言,或就未曾经历的所缘而言。否则,在无始轮回中,根本没有所谓“未生的”罪恶不善法。因此说“在一生中”等,即指他发动此精进的那一生。“产生”:令之生起。当他造作那样的意愿时,便称为“产生欲求”。“作努力”:即付诸行动、奋力而为。“发动精进”:即以种种方式发动身与心的精进。“以精进策励心”:即以此俱生的精进将心提起,通过制止心的懈怠而令其提举。“修勤”:即作勤奋的精进。这四句应按顺序,与习行、修习、多作、不断作相配合。显示巴利原文
Anuppannānanti asamudācāravasena vā ananubhūtārammaṇavasena vā anuppannānaṃ. Aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā nāma na santi. Tenāha ‘‘ekasmiṃ bhave’’tiādi. Yasmiṃ bhave ayaṃ imaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhati, tasmiṃ ekasmiṃ bhave.Janetīti uppādeti. Tādisaṃ chandaṃ kurumāno evaṃ chandaṃ janeti nāma. Vāyāmaṃ karotīti payogaṃ parakkamaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃpavattetīti kāyikacetasikavīriyaṃ pakārato vatteti. Vīriyena cittaṃ paggahitaṃ karotīti teneva sahajātavīriyena cittaṃ ukkhipento kosajjapātato nisedhanena paggahitaṃ karoti. Padahanaṃ pavattetīti padhānaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti. Paṭipāṭiyā panetāni cattāri padāni āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammasātaccakiriyāhi yojetabbāni.
“曾生起的”是依相似之说而说。确实,对于类似的事物可用同一名称,如说“那就是鹧鸪”“那就是药草”。所以论中说“现在像那样的”。“已生的”指已不能被称为“未生”的法。“为了断除”即是为了予以舍断。在“未生的善法”中,“善”意指超越常人的法。这些善法的生起称为证得、获得;反之则未生起、未获得,故说“未获得的初禅等”。当说“为令住立而策励精进”时,这里并非刹那住,而是指相续住,所以解释为“以不断生起的相续而达到住立”。“不忘失”的反面是迷乱,即被敌对法覆蔽而不可见;遮止此迷乱便是不忘失,所以说“为了不忘失,即是为了不毁坏”。“更增长”是数数生起,层层向上,故解释为“为了向上增长”。“广满”由持续修习而成,达到熟练有力的状态,故解释为“为了广满,即成为广大”。“修习圆满”是指令禅那等修习得到充分的培育。显示巴利原文
Uppannapubbānanti sadisavohārena vuttaṃ. Bhavati hi taṃsadisesu tabbohāro yathā ‘‘sā eva tittiri, tāni eva osadhānī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘idāni tādise’’ti. Uppannānanti ‘‘anuppannā’’ti avattabbataṃ āpannānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānanti ettha kusalāti uttarimanussadhammā adhippetā, tesañca uppādo nāma adhigamo paṭilābho, tappaṭikkhepena anuppādo appaṭilābhoti āha ‘‘appaṭiladdhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīna’’nti. ‘‘Ṭhitiyā vīriyaṃ ārabhatī’’ti vutte na khaṇaṭhiti adhippetā tadatthaṃ vīriyārabbhena payojanābhāvato, atha kho pabandhaṭhiti adhippetāti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ uppattipabandhavasena ṭhitattha’’nti. Sammussanaṃ paṭipakkhadhammavasena adassanamupagamananti tappaṭikkhepena asammussanaṃ asammosoti āha ‘‘asammosāyāti avināsanattha’’nti. Bhiyyobhāvo punappunaṃ bhavanaṃ, so pana uparūpari uppattīti āha ‘‘uparibhāvāyā’’ti. Vepullaṃ abhiṇhappavattiyā paguṇabalavabhāvāpattīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāyā’’ti, mahantabhāvāyāti attho. Bhāvanāya paripūraṇatthanti jhānādibhāvanāparibrūhanatthaṃ.
「在四处」:即于“令未生的恶不善法不生”等四个方面。「依完成作用」:指以一种方式同时成就此四种作用。显示巴利原文
Catūsuṭhānesūti anuppannākusalānuppādanādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu. Kiccasādhanavasenāti catubbidhassapi kiccassa ekajjhaṃ nipphādanavasena.
「禅那于前分与道刹那皆不同」:正定是依寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性这些助成定的法——各具投向、审察、喜满、滋益、平静安乐的特相——由相应上的差异,以及随修习增上而转起的四种禅那来分别的。然而,正如精进一支即能完成“令未生的恶不善法不生”等四种正勤的作用,念一支在观身为不净、苦、无常、无我时,即能断除净、乐、常、我想这四种念处的作用,单一的定并不能同时完成四种禅那的作用。因此,前分为初禅之定,于道刹那亦为初禅;同样,前分为第四禅之定,于道刹那亦为第四禅。此处即此意。“依不同道”是指:依初道等各各之道,禅那即有不同。第二禅等亦可作为第二道等的禅那。而这里说“此道的”,是将四种道体视为一个整体来称呼,义即“这个道的”。至于说“此”,则是就禅那方面,显明全同、全不同、一分同的差别。显示巴利原文
Jhānāni pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi nānāti yadipi samādhiupakārakehi abhiniropanānumajjanasampiyāyanabrūhanasantasukhasabhāvehi vitakkādīhi sampayogabhedato bhāvanātisayappavattānaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena sammāsamādhi vibhatto, tathāpi vāyāmo viya anuppannākusalānuppādanādicatuvāyāmakiccaṃ, sati viya ca asubhāsukhāniccānattesu kāyādīsu subhādisaññāppahānacatusatikiccaṃ, eko samādhi catujhānasamādhikiccaṃ na sādhetīti pubbabhāgepi paṭhamajjhānasamādhi eva maggakkhaṇepi, tathā pubbabhāgepi catutthajjhānasamādhi eva maggakkhaṇe pīti attho. Nānāmaggavasenāti paṭhamamaggādinānāmaggavasena jhānāni nānā. Dutiyādayopi maggā dutiyādīnaṃ jhānānaṃ. Ayaṃ panassāti ettha maggabhāvena catubbidhampi ekattena gahetvā ‘‘assā’’ti vuttaṃ, assa maggassāti attho. Ayanti pana ayaṃ jhānavasena sabbasadisasabbāsadisekaccasadisatā viseso.
「依基禅决定而有」:此处以基禅决定为要而作说明,如同《迷惑冰消》中也是如此。然而在《殊胜义论》中,为免与一切宗派的主张相违,是依观的决定而说;但这里为遮止“依所观之禅、依个人意乐”等论调,故说明基禅的决定。须知,观的决定因通于一切情形,在此并未被排斥。至于其他论师的主张,容后一一辨析。所以,先就基禅决定来解释,而说:“先依基禅决定”。人成为初禅者,是因为在近行定出起的那个等至,会使道带有与自身相似的性质,犹如地面的颜色映现在蜥蜴的颜色上。说到“圆满”,即指具有八支或七支。七支,是因缺少正思惟;六支,是因缺少喜觉支。关于道支与觉支的七支、六支情形,依“此理”类推。这里提到的“于无色界有四禅、五禅……”,是指《殊胜义论》中的说法。难道彼处不是说“于无色界,有三禅、四禅生起”吗?确实如此。然而,那是为对此尚有疑惑者,显示他们也能生起那些禅那;故从义理上,即等同于“有四禅、五禅生起”。显示巴利原文
Pādakajjhānaniyamena hotīti idha pādakajjhānaniyamaṃ dhuraṃ katvā vuttaṃ, yathā cettha, evaṃ sammohavinodaniyampi (vibha. aṭṭha. 205). Aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 350) pana vipassanāniyamo vutto sabbavādāvirodhato, idha pana sammasitajjhānapuggalajjhāsayavādanivattanato pādakajjhānaniyamo vutto. Vipassanāniyamo pana sādhāraṇattā idhāpi na paṭikkhittoti daṭṭhabbo. Aññe ca ācariyavādā parato vakkhamānā vibhajitabbāti yathāvuttameva tāva pādakajjhānaniyamaṃ vibhajanto āha ‘‘pādakajjhānaniyamena tāvā’’ti. Paṭhamajjhāniko hoti, yasmā āsannapadese vuṭṭhitasamāpatti maggassa attano sadisabhāvaṃ karoti bhūmivaṇṇo viya godhāvaṇṇassa. Paripuṇṇāneva hontīti aṭṭha satta ca hontīti attho. Satta honti sammāsaṅkappassa abhāvato. Cha honti pītisambojjhaṅgassa abhāvato. Maggaṅgabojjhaṅgānaṃ sattachabhāvaṃ atidisati ‘‘esa nayo’’ti. Arūpe catukkapañcakajjhānaṃ…pe… vuttaṃ aṭṭhasāliniyanti adhippāyo. Nanu tattha ‘‘arūpe tikacatukkajjhānaṃ uppajjatī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 350) vuttaṃ , na ‘‘catukkapañcakajjhāna’’nti? Saccametaṃ, yesu pana saṃsayo atthi, tesaṃ uppattidassanena , tena atthato ‘‘catukkapañcakajjhānaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vuttameva hotīti evamāhāti veditabbaṃ. Samudāyañca apekkhitvā ‘‘tañca lokuttaraṃ, na lokiya’’nti āha ‘‘avayavekattaṃ liṅgasamudāyassa visesakaṃ hotī’’ti. Catutthajjhānameva hi tattha lokiyaṃ uppajjati, na catukkaṃ, pañcakaṃ vāti. Ettha kathanti pādakajjhānassa abhāvā kathaṃ daṭṭhabbanti attho. Taṃjhānikāvassa tattha tayo maggā uppajjanti, tajjhānikaṃpaṭhamaphalādiṃ pādakaṃ katvā uparimaggabhāvanāyāti adhippāyo. Tikacatukkajjhānikaṃ pana maggaṃ bhāvetvā tattha uppannassa arūpacatutthajjhānaṃ, tajjhānikaṃ phalañca pādakaṃ katvā uparimaggabhāvanāya aññajhānikāpi uppajjantīti, jhānaṅgādiniyāmikā pubbābhisaṅkhārasamāpattipādakaṃ, na sammasitabbāti phalassāpi pādakatā daṭṭhabbā.
“有些人”是指摩罗瓦毗大达多长老。“又有些人”是指三藏小无畏长老。第三次所说的“有些人”,则是针对那些持“唯基禅决定”论的三藏小龙长老,以及除紧接前文提到的两位长老之外的其余长老。显示巴利原文
Keci panāti moravāpīmahādattattheraṃ sandhāyāha. Puna kecīti tipiṭakacūḷābhayattheraṃ . Tatiyavāre kecīti ‘‘pādakajjhānameva niyametī’’ti evaṃ vādinaṃ tipiṭakacūḷanāgattherañceva anantaraṃ vutte dve ca there ṭhapetvā itare there sandhāya vadati.
403 当以“不再转起”的方式来把握属于相续的苦与集时,灭也仿佛属于相续,因此才说“自己的四圣谛”,或说“他人的”,其道理相同。所以世尊说:“就在这仅有寻长、有想有识的身体中,我施设世间,施设世间集,施设世间灭,施设世间灭道。”那么,初学者如何把握灭谛与道谛呢?他依传闻等方式,把握它们已如此成就的共相。如此解说时,即使指出出世间觉支,此把握方式亦不相违。“如可能者”,意思是依可能的方式了知:除灭谛外,对于其余诸谛,应以集与灭的角度来把握。显示巴利原文
403. Sasantatipariyāpannānaṃ dukkhasamudayānaṃ appavattibhāvena pariggayhamāno nirodhopi sasantatipariyāpanno viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘attano vā cattāri saccānī’’ti. Parassa vāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññāpemi, lokasamudayañca paññāpemi, lokanirodhañca paññāpemi, lokanirodhagāminipaṭipadañca paññāpemī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45) kathaṃ pana ādikammiko nirodhamaggasaccāni pariggaṇhātīti? Anussavādisiddhamākāraṃ pariggaṇhāti. Evañca katvā lokuttarabojjhaṅge uddissāpi pariggaho na virujjhati. Yathāsambhavatoti sambhavānurūpaṃ, ṭhapetvā nirodhasaccaṃ sesasaccavasena samudayavayāti veditabbāti attho.
404 “骨锁有肉”等七种尸林,因属骨相业处,而其余如膨胀相等是自性法,因此对这九种尸林说明了安止业处。“只有两种”:即入出息念与三十二分身,仅此二者。“倾向”:指观的倾向,亦即对应遍知法的把握。威仪、观察等,只是色法状态的差别,如同表色等,故不能纳入遍知的范围。诸盖与觉支最初不应被执取,因此说“威仪……乃至……不生起”。以头发等概念为引导,就像把握与之相关的取蕴法一样;以威仪等概念为引导,则把握彼状态下的色法;以诸盖等为切入点,则把握与之相应、依止于它的法——基于此意趣,摩诃西瓦长老说在威仪等中“倾向会生起”。然而,“于我之中是否还有这些”等说法,是为显示初学者并不期望威仪等的自性法。因为遍知是在尚未遍知的前提下进行的。显示巴利原文
404. ‘‘Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṃ samaṃsa’’ntiādikā satta sivathikā aṭṭhikakammaṭṭhānatāya itarāsaṃ uddhumātakādīnaṃ sabhāvenevāti navannaṃ sivathikānaṃ appanākammaṭṭhānatā vuttā. Dveyevāti ānāpānaṃ, dvattiṃsākāroti imāni dveyeva. Abhinivesoti vipassanābhiniveso, so pana sammasaniyadhammapariggaho. Iriyāpathā, ālokitādayo ca rūpadhammānaṃ avatthāvisesamattatāya na sammasanupagā viññattiādayo viya. Nīvaraṇabojjhaṅgā ādito na pariggahetabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘iriyāpatha…pe… na jāyatī’’ti. Kesādiapadesena tadupādānadhammā viya iriyāpathādiapadesena tadavatthā rūpadhammā pariggayhanti, nīvaraṇādimukhena ca taṃsampayuttā, taṃnissayadhammāti adhippāyena mahāsivatthero ca iriyāpathādīsupi ‘‘abhiniveso jāyatī’’ti avoca. ‘‘Atthi nu kho me’’tiādi pana sabhāvato iriyāpathādīnaṃ ādikammikassa anicchitabhāvadassanaṃ. Apariññāpubbikā hi pariññāti.
在「诸比丘,于此有比丘」等总说和详说中,虽然处处都提及比丘,那只是为显示依此修行方能成就比丘的身份。但为了表明这一开示普适于一切人,世尊便说「诸比丘,无论他是谁」,而不只说「比丘」;为说明并非仅限于比丘,又进一步说「无论他是哪位比丘」等。「了知」:指由见道而了知,不逾越已知之限,通达最高、最上道智,故称为了知。由于这是道果的状态,所以最上之果——阿拉汉果,也被称为了知。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ ‘‘idha bhikkhave bhikkhū’’tiādinā uddesaniddesesu tattha tattha bhikkhuggahaṇaṃ kataṃ taṃpaṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanatthaṃ, desanā pana sabbasādhāraṇāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yo hi koci bhikkhave’’ icceva vuttaṃ, na bhikkhu yevāti dassento ‘‘yo hi koci bhikkhu vā’’tiādimāha. Dassanamaggena ñātamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā jānantī sikhāppattā aggamaggapaññā aññā nāma, tassa phalabhāvato aggaphalaṃ pīti āha ‘‘aññāti arahatta’’nti.
即使在非时,也显示教法的导向出离性——这是其联结之义。「导向出离者」即结论。显示巴利原文
Appatarepi kāle sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ dassentoti yojanā. Niyyātentoti nigamento.